Home

1999 GMC Yukon Owners Manual

1. An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 17 13 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 45 000 Miles 75 000 km o Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 48 000 Miles 80 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional inf
2. 7 9 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 18 000 Miles 30 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 21 000 Miles 35 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 24 000 Miles 40 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote 7 10 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance Check rear front axle fluid level and add f
3. suu 3 14 yellow blue Replacement Bulbs 1i eek ates sek ek wares YS 6 61 6 62 cur MTS 6 65 hl nm 6 45 Wheel Used rd exer bres EY 6 46 Replacing Safety Belts 00000 1 57 Reporting Safety Defects 0000 8 10 Restraints Checking icta ees ipit ete V eh duse ctt eic Rus 1 57 Child 25 euch perpe e ben rie EET 1 41 Head e p RR Raw REFER DPSES EU 1 5 1 7 Replacing Parts After a Crash suus 1 57 System Check esae Re ce eene e o 7 35 Retained Accessory Power 0 00 00 eee eens 2 22 Reverse Automatic Transmission 0 2 26 Right Front Passenger Position 1 23 Roadside Assistance 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 8 6 Roadside Assistance Canadian 0000 8 7 Rocking Your Vehicle 0 00 00 esses 5 33 Rotation Tires i2 susce Rd Archia 6 41 S afety Belt Extender llle esses 1 57 Safety Belts venga aw ee ree etre dre enn 1 9 Idults eet ere tete e Aedes eM 1 14 Cie EE 6 50 Center Passenger Position sslesssss 1 36 Children 25st rere e a ien 1 38 Driver Position ve cadeusg ene RUF ipei unen 1 14 Extender sese ree e RR eer ee ears 1 57 How to Wear Properly sssssseeesss 1 14 Incorrect Usage 00000 1 17 1 55 1 56 Lap Belt scsaccieacecbintias EEEIEE es et 1 37 Lap Shoulder 0 0 0 0 00 0008 1 14 1 31 Larger Children rm m cores t dean
4. 8 12 8 13 Owner Publications Ordering 8 12 8 13 Raaiator EP 5 15 Radiator Pressure Cap 0 0 0 cee eee eee ee 6 22 Radio Reception 0 0 e eee eee eee ee 3 21 Radio fda sew ta r NE E E PCIE EE 3 8 Rain Driving In iiie RR pe PEERS 4 30 Reading Lamps sessseeeee eee eee 2 50 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Systems 3 3 PLS os ovens hup sc e e a dae RE e 6 20 7 42 Child Security Locks 0 0 0 0 00 0008 2 5 DOOTS rm eR ee RE e I RECH CO RE ENS 2 11 Lamp Bulb Replacement esses 6 37 Outside Seat Position esses 1 30 Safety Belt Comfort Guides 0 1 34 Seat Audio RSA 2 0 0 eee eee eee eee 3 12 Seat Passengers 0 cece cee cee ee eee 1 30 TOWING 6i eR RE ECHREREERU ECKE REG E dni 5 8 Window Defogger 0 00 ce eee eee es 3 7 Windshield Wiper and Washer 2 42 Rearview Mirror 0 00 eee ee 2 51 Rearview Mirror Electrochromic Day Night with Compass Temperature Display Headlamp Delay 2 51 Rearview Mirror Inside 000 cee ee eee 2 51 Reclining Front Seatbacks 00005 1 4 Recovery Hooks 0 0 00 criresornra tsis 5 33 Recovery Tank Coolant 0000000005 5 12 Recreational Vehicle Towing 000005 4 42 Refrigerants Air Conditioning 6 64 Remote Compact Disc Player
5. 1 32 yellow blue The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash Each position next to the windows has a shoulder belt height adjuster Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height that is right for you yellow blue You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body To move the height adjuster down push in at the word PRESS and move the height adjuster to the desired position You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide After you move the adjuster to where you want it try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it has locked into position Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle 1 3
6. OS Front Rear Position Position 3 Position the jack under the vehicle If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle position the jack on the axle near the flat tire between the spring and the shock absorber yellow blue Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 5 25 yellow blue 5 Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire zA T1 tir Lis 6 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Front Position Rear Position With UP on the ratchet facing you raise the vehicle by turning the ratchet and wheel wrench clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit 5 26 Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from t
7. 000 6 8 Filling Your Tank 1 0 0 0 00 cece eee eee eee 6 5 ABE 35 Se sob air ENE SEE o caps edis s deine 2 82 In Foreign Countries 0 0 0 0 00008 6 5 System Capacity 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 6 64 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 00000 6 57 Gases Engine Coolant Temperature 2 76 Engine Oil Pressure 0 0 0 0 0 eae 2 79 Fuel cetoupeie greci ed Ceres in Cee Nt e esd ds 2 82 Speedometer iiec esp tree ELA Re ERI ERE 2 71 Tachometer x acea et a s ett rema or viet 2 71 Voltmeter y cuore otio ea te am do e Oe ce ee 2 74 GAWR e abe ieee Hee bid bed edie C RI Pew gre 4 44 Gear Positions Automatic Transmission 2 25 GIOVE BOX 433 ode RAO E ota a Sera tS 2 55 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities 8 5 GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 6 54 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0000 4 44 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 0 4 43 Guideen Francais s riores eoe eme ex ee Rea ii GVWR esa decani E aa e dece Ea es e E 4 43 Hatogen B lbs es vere io Cn Segele hanes eek 6 34 Hazard Warning Flashers 0 0 0000000 5 2 Head Restraints s rasse renega naua eee eee eee 1 5 Headlamp Delay 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 2 48 Headlamps 2 222 e RR ERR ct rhis 2 46 6 34 Bulb Replacement 0 6 34 6 61 High Low Beam Changer sssee 2 41 On Reminder i eere eR Ma
8. 2 27 Tilt Steering Wheel 0 00 00 000 000 2 39 Time Setting th 2er Rote 3 7 Tire Chains sss too toners ctetu eee 6 46 Tire Loading i duce eR DE ER pP RR 4 43 yellow blue Tire Loading Information Label 4 43 Trailer WH S 2s casa Rex ne T E E DRE ep Y ges 6 39 Brakes zzi serier E E EE Oa 4 49 Alignment and Balance 005 6 45 Driving on Grades 20 0 0 0c ee eee eee 4 51 Buying NeW iue ee em yeaa ee te twits 6 43 Driving with soes medsen E Eaa eee eee 4 49 Chains ii sees Sine Sa neg oe eee Gand Paterno SPEO 6 46 Engine Cooling When Towing 4 53 ChangingaFlat 00 0 5 19 TIVE CHGS PE 4 48 Cleantlg pA eee hones 234 00 ep Eq EE E 6 52 Maintenance When Towing 0 00 4 53 Inflation 2 i em by ewe TOS Ee aaa E 6 40 Parking on Hills 00 0 eee eee eee eee 4 52 Inflation Check sees 7 35 Safety Chains 0 0 0 0 cee eee 4 48 Inspection and Rotation 00000 6 41 Tongue Weight icem bi oce m mda deba 4 47 Loading iia Ggezi4yteneweifeSeker eAd pets 4 43 Total Weight on Tires lesse eese 4 48 luci AP 6 40 TOWING 2 sais cone wey RU RP RU e E RR 4 45 Ternperat te uere diced mm km Re Re een 6 44 Tim Signals s eek mre be ey ERR cese 4 51 Traction corte ett dea aot mco iae eps 6 44 Porn MERETRICEM 4 46 Tread Weal e os ccs cing ea eom e X Rue eod 6 44 Wiring Harness save c
9. 2 81 Safety Belt Reminder 1 10 2 72 Security sh owed ca Raps UE Ea eh re 4 ec 2 80 Service Engine Soon 0 00 00 lees 2 76 Service Four Wheel Drive 05 2 80 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator 2 81 Loading Your Vehicle 0 00 00 esse 4 43 9 6 yellow blue Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving 4 15 Lockout Prevention 00 c eee ee eee eee 2 6 Kocks 13 56cm iaa Unies gestartet epoca 2 3 Child Security siseses et eraot dann 2 5 Cylinder i335 i patties than ERES I Ee ee 7 36 DOOF kos scene hy etes met 2 3 Ignition Transmission Check 7 38 Key Lock Cylinder Service 0 7 36 Powet DOOE 3 212 ee eniin op ela a ote Pc md 2 4 Window uento oet we eo e RR eas 2 38 Lubricants and Fluids llsleseseeeeeense 7 41 Lubrication Weatherstrips 6 50 7 36 Lubrication Service Body 000005 7 36 Luggage Carrier i oer eme ey etis 2 59 Maintenance Normal Replacement Parts 6 65 Maintenance Record 00 0 c eee 7 43 Maintenance Schedule 2 00 00 0 eee eee eee 7 1 Long Trip Highway Definition 7 6 Long Trip Highway Intervals 7 6 Owner Checks and Services 0 00 7 35 Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 39 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 41 Scheduled M
10. A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it s more likely that the fetus won t be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position earlier in this section The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again Air Bag System This part explains the air bag system Your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger Next Generation frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag But even these air bags must inflate very quickly if they are to do their job and comply with federal regulations yellow blue Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren t wearing your safety
11. Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 32 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 97 500 Miles 162 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILEAGE f Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first Edo See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level an
12. Driver s Door Alarm Delay If you open the driver s door using your key the alarm will not sound for eight seconds Leaving Programming Mode When programming is done turn the ignition to OFF and replace the RADIO fuse Fuse 17 2 19 Passlock Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock theft deterrent system Passlock is a passive theft deterrent system Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with fuel is disabled During normal operation the SECURITY light will go off approximately five seconds after the key is turned to the RUN ignition position If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the engine Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts If the engine is running and the SECURITY light comes on you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off However your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time You may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index See your dealer for service In an emergency call the GMC Roadside Assistance Center at 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 in the United States or 1 800 268 6800 in Canada 2 20 yellow blue New Vehicle Brea
13. SCAN Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again The sound will mute while scanning PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 Just 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station A Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons The sound will mute When it returns release the button Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton P SCAN The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons Select either the AM FM1 or FM2 mode and then press P SCAN It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons yellow blue Press P SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific preset station P SCAN will light up on the display while in this mode If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in the radio display will show the channel number P1 P6 for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station Setting the Tone
14. With this feature you can lock the rear side doors so they can t be opened from the inside by passengers Move the button up to engage the security feature Move the button down to return the door locks to normal operation See Feature Customization in the Index for further information on turning this feature on and off Lockout Prevention To protect you from locking your key in the vehicle this feature stops the power door locks from locking when the keys are in the ignition and a door is open If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition none of the doors will lock Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle take your keys open your door and set the locks from inside Then get out and close the door For information on how to set the door locks see Theft Deterrent System and Feature Customization in the Index Keyless Entry System You can lock and unlock your doors tailgate or panel doors from about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle yellow blue Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept an
15. e Avoiding steep uphill grades e 2 77 If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling Your Tank in the Index The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water 2 78 yellow blue If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel see Fuel in the Index Poor fuel quality w
16. Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Points Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Conditioning Part No 12345579 or equivalent Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon Superlube GM Part No 12371287 or equivalent yellow blue Part E Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the Services or Periodic Maintenance can be added on date odometer reading and who performed the service the following record pages Also you should retain all in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval maintenance receipts Your owner information portfolio Any additional information from Owner Checks and is a convenient place to store them Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED yellow blue Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED yellow blue Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED yellow blue Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED yellow blue Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact GMC if you need assistance This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects AN 8 8 8 8 nas Go oo Oo ona Customer Satisfaction Procedure Customer
17. a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on your arms The baby would be almost impossible to hold Secure the baby in an infant restraint Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle A baby doesn t weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can t hold it For example in a crash CAUTION Continued 1 40 Child Restraints Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints Q What are the different types of add on child restraints A Add on child restraints are available in four basic types When selecting a child restraint take into consideration not only the child s weight and size but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used yellow blue An infant car bed A is a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle It s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface With an infant car bed make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle 1 41 yellow blue A rear facing infant restraint B positions an infant to face the rear of the vehicle Rear facing infant restraints are designed for infants of up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg and about one year of age This type of restraint faces the rear so that the infant s head neck and bod
18. 00 0000 eee 2 5 LOCKS Laser ade Sor a duli V sies etf edidic E NUS 2 3 lucir 2 12 Rear 22i bee ere E I en vk E PI Ce 2 11 Side 1s deberia dap n bach det we sae DO IN EC ath ans 2 3 Storage Pocket esee er eee dpt edet 2 57 Driver Position lseeseeeeeeee nee 1 14 Driving City a Sick des ed ee e ea Aree ee neha ees 4 33 Defensive seterio ee ede deren Ir ER hae 4 2 Drunken 4 23 06 pL ad DU RR adh da wie REX PS 4 3 Freeway ucro derbe doe Rr RE ice dde ceci 4 34 Ina Blizzard esed bett toe e Rete os 4 40 In th Rain 4152 esee Re Rr Ret eee dettes 4 30 hifi c 4 28 Off Road ocio o eee eraat eer EDO ES 4 14 On CURVES vede RECS RE XU Ua eR eb ERREUR 4 9 On Grades While Towing a Trailer 4 51 On Hill and Mountain Roads issus 4 36 On Snow and Ice 2 0 cece eee 4 38 Through Water 00 0 eee e eee eee eee 4 32 Wet Roads 0 cece eens 4 30 Wintera ccs cep Sa hae ea aU ARR a M etate oe 4 38 With a Trailer e eee ok rrr a eee Meee 4 49 Drunken Driving esses eee eee 4 3 Electric Tailgate Glass Release 2 39 Electrical Equipment Adding 2 23 3 22 6 56 Electrical System 0 0 0 0 c ee eee eee eee 6 56 Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror with Compass Temperature Display Headlamp Delay 2 51 Electrochromic Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors 2 54 3 7 9 3 Electronic Compass cs sss eessen snien erii eita 2 51 Engine 2nlsecde
19. BASS Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass TREB Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player To load a cassette tape with the ignition off press EJECT or RECALL Then insert the cassette tape If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape will begin playing 3 10 yellow blu
20. But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you d use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers Changing a tire can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving Set the parking brake firmly Put the shift lever in PARK P If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL N Turn off the engine To be even more certain the
21. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 6 24 yellow blue What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which won t damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you don t need to add anything else Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid like alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant NOTICE If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost wouldn t be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system NOTICE If you use the proper coolant you don t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful yellow blue Checking Coolant The coolant recovery tank is located on the passenger s side at the rear corner of the
22. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane 4 34 yellow blue At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it s slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer no
23. If Equipped Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Cluster Warning Lights Gages and Indicators yellow blue Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in a vehicle with children Your vehicle has one double sided key for the ignition and all door locks If you ever lose your key your dealer will be able to assist you with obtaining a new one Your vehicle also has a key that locks and unlocks the center floor console only yellow blue Door Locks Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out When a door is locked the inside handle won t open it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle This may not be so obvious You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren t locked Wear safety belts properly lock your doors and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle Side Doors To open the door from the outside pull the handle up and pull the door open To open the door from the inside pull the lever toward you and push the door open 2 3 Front Door Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle You can use
24. If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum yellow blue wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement 6 45 yellow blue Tire Chains NOTICE NOTICE The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis Don t use tire chains They can damage your vehicle because there s not enough clearance Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer rec
25. If you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s air bag the bag may not work properly You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s air bag Do not open or break the air bag coverings If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water such as water up to the carpeting or higher or if water enters your vehicle and soaks the carpet the air bag controller can be soaked and ruined If this ever happens and then you start your vehicle the damage could make the air bags inflate even if there s no crash You would have to replace the air bags as well as the sensors and related parts If your vehicle is ever in a flood or if it s exposed to water that soaks the carpet you can avoid needless repair costs by turning off the vehicle immediately and disconnecting the battery cables Don t let anyone start the vehicle under any circumstances See your dealer for service yellow blue Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle You don t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your dealer and the GM Service Manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system To purchase a service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Ind
26. If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over yellow blue Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand your wheels won t get good traction You can t accelerate as quickly turning is more difficult and you ll need longer braking distances It s best to use a low gear when you re in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don t get stuck When you drive on sand you ll sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is On loosely packed sand as on beaches or sand dunes your tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand This will improve traction 4 25 Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it s very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control Dr
27. Index for further details At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced 7 35 Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield Also see Wiper Blades Cleaning in the Index Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check Your vehicle has an indicator on the engine that lets you know when the air cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be changed Check indicator at least twice a year or when your oil is changed whichever occurs first See Air Cleaner in the Index for more information Inspect your air cleaner filter restriction indicator more often if the vehicle is used in dusty areas or under off road conditions Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather more frequent application may
28. NOTICE Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth you can destroy your transmission For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains in the Index Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels Shift the transfer case into 4HI Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that doesn t get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out Or you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle in the Index yellow blue Using the Recovery Hooks Your vehicle is equipped with recovery hooks The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle You may need to use them if you re stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving 5 33 5 34 yellow blue The recovery hooks when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on th
29. Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 25 REVERSE R Use this gear to back up NOTICE Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission see Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index NEUTRAL N In this position your engine doesn t connect with the wheels To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only Also use NEUTRAL N when your vehicle is being towed 2 26 yellow blue Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Don t shift out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing NOTICE Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine racing isn t covered by your warranty AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you re Going less than about 35 mph 56 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 56 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down
30. cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests A The belt is over an armrest 1 19 yellow blue Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which aren t as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen A The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 20 yellow blue Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it y DEVE a A The belt is twisted across the body 1 21 To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle yellow Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts
31. feature that allows the window to be lowered without holding the switch Press and hold the side of the window switch marked AUTO for one second to activate the express down mode The express down mode can be canceled at any time by pressing the opposite side of the switch To open the window partway lightly tap the switch until the window is at the desired position The power window switch has a lockout feature This feature prevents the passenger s windows from operating except from the driver s position when the front driver s side switch is in LOCK When the switch is moved to NORM the rear power windows will operate again Electric Tailgate Glass Release Before operating your electric tailgate glass release see Rear Doors in the the Index Your vehicle has the theft deterrent system If it is armed use the transmitter not the key to open the tailgate or the alarm will sound The hatch switch will not work while the system is armed See Theft Deterrent System in the Index I The electric hatch release button lets you release the tailgate glass To release the glass press the top of the button REAR HATCH Then lift the window up to open The shift lever must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N for the release to work There is also a power door lock switch at the rear of the vehicle which will allow you to lock or unlock all of the doors See Power Doors Locks in the Index yellow blue Horn P
32. highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Don t let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency 4 36 Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain yellow blue If you drive regularly in steep country or if you re planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable See Off Road Driving in the Index for information about driving off road Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts
33. left door edge outward and pull the door open The rear doors have a check assembly to keep them from fully opening during normal use To fully open either rear door you must release the check strap To release the check strap just 1 Open the door partway until the white mark on the check strap is fully outside the door edge If the end of the strap catches the pin on the door the door is open too far 2 12 yellow blue Then hold the strap at the white mark pull the strap toward you and open the door all the way To re engage the door check strap just close the door and the strap will catch the pin To close the doors close the driver s side door first After securely closing the door close the passenger s side door Make sure both doors are latched securely To lock the rear doors from outside the vehicle put your key in the lock and turn it clockwise If you have power door locks you can lock the side doors as well as the rear doors from inside the vehicle For more information see Power Door Locks in this section Theft Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal However there are ways you can help Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside it s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves so don t do it When
34. should be above MIN If it isn t have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark 6 30 yellow blue What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid NOTICE Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they ll have to be replaced Don t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Appearance Care in the Index Brake Wear Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are ne
35. whichever occurs first These intervals only summarize maintenance services Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance Long Trip Highway Definition Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the conditions from the Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance is true Do not use this schedule if the vehicle is used for trailer towing driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads Use the Short Trip City schedule for these conditions Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower 7 6 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Intervals Every 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or every 12 months whichever occurs first Chassis Lubrication or every 12 months whichever occurs first Drive Axle Service Tire Rotation Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Fuel Filter Replacement Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transmission Service severe conditions only Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Fuel Tank Cap and Lines Inspection Exhaust Gas Recirculation System Inspection Evaporative Control System Inspection Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Automatic Transmission Service normal conditions Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV Valve Inspection Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km C
36. with safety belts And it explains the air bag system Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear a safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you re not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too yellow blue It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light in the Index In most states and Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here s why They work You never know if you ll be in a crash If you do have a crash you don t know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hur
37. 17 When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you re not prepared When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles your wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you can t control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn t Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunken Driving in the Index 4 18 yellow blue Driving on Off Road Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can t do There are some hills that simply can t be driven no matter how well b
38. 30 if it s going to be 0 F 18 C or above These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 NOTICE Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines Starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C consider using either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures Engine Oil Additives Don t add anything to your oil Your dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added 6 13 When to Change Engine Oil If any one of these is true for you use the short trip city maintenance schedule Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles 8 to 16 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off road frequently You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle The vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application Driving under these conditions causes engine
39. 45 Nut FOrque bu eet uae hr to e bare ed 5 29 6 63 Replacement i i cc eee re hec eee E RE 6 45 Used Replacement 00 eate tsy 6 46 hr M E 5 20 9 12
40. 6 48 Starter Switch Check lssllesleeeseeses 7 37 Starting Your Engine 0 000000000 2 22 SEAN ines tender eons acide e poa tatc o E EEA 5 9 Steering sadri gea ESSE UERIDES ERA eh eie daw ee 4 9 In Emergencies ees erc eciirisceirerenni titros 4 10 POWER Mcr 4 9 Sp ed Sensitive sies erse iseia KEA EESE E EE ea 4 9 TADS i asoa tinni eia ear E gees are 4 9 Wheel TIE uci tor sb ret E E a 2 39 9 10 yellow blue Storage Compartments 00 00 00 ean 2 55 Storage Overhead seeleseeeeeeesese 2 55 Storage Vehicle 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 6 33 Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow 5 32 Sun VISOIS ezssv wibedb uer 3 enc kes Pets 2 63 Sunglasses Storage 0 0 cee eee eee eee 2 55 Symbols Vehicle 2 c eee eee eee teense v Tachometer pe E E EE E dary aah 2 71 Talpa o nto a O DS dled e Re 2 11 Tailgate Glass Release lees esses 2 39 Tape Player Cate 212 keeper been ds 3 22 Telephone Cellular esee 2 67 Theta ostendam ei etam qau E E EEE ET 2 13 Theft Deterrent System 000 000 0405 2 13 ANE 26e ebbe env eee pesi ee 2 14 Disarming idR e RE eine S eed re GR end 2 15 Shock Sensor asserat etes Se ache ae 2 14 Turning Off rte xbv DRE D bees 2 16 THEFTLOCK 04 vacates tos acid e Ebr edad ie ert 3 19 Thermostat oe tct eter eroe ope eam ede Qe aa sek 6 23 Third Gear Automatic Transmission
41. Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing any court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program yellow blue Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs GMC has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with GMC by dialing 1 800 GMC 8583 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices GMC encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to GMC the letter should be addressed to GMC s Customer Assistance Center United States Pontiac GMC Custome
42. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow etc be sure to get it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes This protects the circuit until the current load returns to normal or the problem is fixed Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index for more information Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can yellow blue Instrument Panel Fuse Block The fuse block access door is on the driver s side edge of the instrument panel Pull off the cover to a
43. Are Questions Many People Ask About p pmi pan 1 36 Safety Belts and the Answers 1 38 4 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 41 4 Driver Position 1 54 1 22 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 57 3 Right Front Passenger Position 1 57 3 Air Bag System 1 57 0 Rear Seat Passengers Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Center Passenger Position Children Child Restraints Larger Children Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats how to adjust them and fold them up and down It also tells you about reclining front seatbacks and head restraints Power Seats You can adjust the front seats with the controls located on the side of the seat next to the door 1 2 yellow blue You can use the round center knob to move the seat to where you want it To raise the seat move the knob up To lower the seat move the knob down To move the seat forward move the knob toward the front of the vehicle To move the seat rearward move the knob toward the rear of the vehicle You can also raise and lower the front and rear of the seat To raise the front of the seat move the front lever up To lower the front of the seat move the front lever down To raise the rear of the seat move the rear lever up To lower the rear of the seat move the rear lever down The switch locate
44. Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users Customer Assistance Offices GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities Roadside Assistance Canadian Roadside Assistance Courtesy Transportation Warranty Information Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada Customer Satisfaction Procedure yellow blue Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to GMC Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by calling 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 Customer Assistance prompt In Canada contact GM of Ca
45. Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 87 000 Miles 145 000 km I Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first bo See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILEAGE SERVIC Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first e See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Continued 7 21 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Continued Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 93 000 Miles
46. Doe ao roh E npe te EE 1 46 Where to PUL i e n nee RE 1 45 Cigarette Lighter 0 00 0 ce eee eee eee 2 61 Circuit Breakers and Fuses 000 5 6 57 Cleaner Air 0 0 ccc ec cc eee eee 6 15 6 64 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels 000 000 eese 6 52 Exterior Lamps Lenses lues 6 51 Fabti 5i casa eb Eee REMO ee nls xo YA 6 47 Glas actress eacus equo alacant 6 50 Inside of Your Vehicle 000004 6 47 Instrument Panel 0 00000 e ee eae 6 49 Interior Plastic Components 04 6 49 cau eM 6 49 Outside of Your Vehicle 0 004 6 51 Speaker Covers sero e e e ttisto 6 49 Special Problems 0 00 00 eee ee aes 6 48 SUNS PP 6 48 Tir S iore hx gteee hss oaeeeg sead ae ce dares Rer 6 52 AVAT n IATE E EE E coaneedtoed 6 49 Wheels 24 ere Rr rex expe em S 6 52 Windshield and Wiper Blades 6 50 Wood Panels uers 2 2 eee eee ee 6 49 Climate Control System 0 00 00 0 000000 3 2 Clock Setting the eirese tonis sedis cecinit eee eee 3 7 Comfort Controls 0 0 0 cee eee eee 3 2 Comfort Guides Rear Safety Belts 1 34 Compact Disc Care 0 ee eee pan eee ee 3 24 Compact Disc Player 00 3 14 3 16 Compact Disc Player Errors 3 15 3 19 Compass Electronic 0 0 eee 2 51 Compass Rearview Mirror with 2 51 Co
47. ER 1 54 Passenger Position 0 0 0 0 eee eae 1 23 Questions and Answers 0 0 eee eee eeee 1 13 Rear Comfort Guides 0 002000 1 34 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions 1 30 Rear Seat Passengers 0 00000 00 00008 1 30 Reminder Light 0 00 1 10 2 72 Replacing After a Crash 00 000 1 57 Right Front Passenger Position 1 23 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 1 16 1 32 Smaller Children and Babies 1 38 Use During Pregnancy 0 002000 1 22 Why They Work eodera mesra dantan E eee eee 1 10 Safety Chains se xscsigb die ienaa e ee REL ne hd 4 48 Safety Defects Reporting 0000 8 10 Safety Warnings and Symbols 04 iii Scheduled Maintenance Services 0 7 4 Seatback Reclining Front 0000 1 4 yellow blue Seats Folding the Rear eese 1 6 Heated Front eiernes aee aeaa eee eee 1 3 Heated Rear zie reor re etre a pets 1 8 Lumbar Adjustment 0 00 00 000005 1 3 PO WET nd MARRE TIPP 1 2 Rear praa ese mri desta he ane deere acer 1 6 Restraint Systems 0 0 0 c ee eee eee eee 1 1 seat Controls 1 ise cres Reeve m RR 1 2 Securing a Child Restraint 1 48 1 50 1 52 Second Gear Automatic Transmission 2 27 Security Light iss iier RI DORIA RR Rap RR 2 80 Security S
48. Plugs Spark Plug Gap Fuel Filter Wiper Blades Front Wiper Blade Type Front Wiper Blade Length Front Wiper Blade Rear Wiper Blade Type Rear Wiper Blade Length Rear A1301C high capacity air cleaner filter VORTEC 5700 V8 R AC Type PF52 AC Type A1300Ct AC Type 41 932 0 060 in 1 52 mm AC Type GF626 GM Part No 22154886 Trico 18 inches 45 0 cm GM Part No 22154396 Trico 14 inches 35 5 cm 6 65 yellow blue f NOTES 6 66 yellow blue Section 7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety dependability and emission control performance Introduction Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services Short Trip City Definition 2 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 4 5 5 Short Trip City Intervals 6 6 7 25 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 35 Part B Owner Checks and Services 39 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections 41 Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 43 Part E Maintenance Record Long Trip Highway Definition Long Trip Highway Intervals IMPORTANT KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your GM dealer for details yellow blue Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Pr
49. Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort yellow blue Speed Sensitive Steering This system varies the amount of steering effort proportionate to your vehicle speed Steering is easier at lower speeds for maneuvering and parking ease As your vehicle speed increases the steering effort also increases At highway speeds the amount of steering effort is increased for vehicle control and stability Steering Tips Driving on Curves It s important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here s why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there s no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you ll understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you re in a curve speed is the one factor you can control 4 9 Suppose you re steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering
50. adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide After you move the adjuster to where you want it try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it has locked into position Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Q What s wrong with this The shoulder belt is too loose It won t give nearly as much protection this way yellow blue You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body 1 17 yellow blue Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you The belt is buckled in the wrong place 1 18 yellow blue Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen not at the pelvic bones and that could
51. affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Don t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Don t use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High
52. an ACDelco Freedom battery When it s time for a new battery we recommend an ACDelco Freedom battery Get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label Vehicle Storage If you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down yellow blue Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you aren t careful See Jump Starting in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods Also for your audio system see Theft Deterrent Feature in the Index 6 33 Bulb Replacement Before you replace any bulbs be sure that all the lamps are off and the engine isn t running For the proper bulb type see Replacement Bulbs in the Index For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer s service department Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package 6 34 yellow blue Headlamps Parking Turn Signal Lamp Removal 1 Remove the two phillips head screws on the side of the parking turn signal bulb assembly The parking turn signal assembly mu
53. and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you ll want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway 4 10 yellow blue Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you can t there isn t room That s the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking in Emergencies earlier in t
54. and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 36 000 Miles 60 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY mE J SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first E See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 7 12 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 39 000 Miles 65 000 km LE qd Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 42 000 Miles 70 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first
55. area trim panels To return the shade to the shade holder pull up on the shade handle to release the shade posts from the retaining sockets Let the shade move forward and latch the shade posts into the front most retaining sockets To remove the shade from the vehicle first let the shade go all the way into the holder Then push the shade holder toward the passenger s side of the vehicle Lift the shade up on the driver s side swing the shade rearward and take it out of the vehicle To put the shade in the vehicle first make sure the shade slot in the holder faces rearward with the round surface facing down Then hold the shade at an angle and place the shade holder tab into the slot in the passenger s side trim panel Move the other end of the shade forward and hold it next to the driver s side trim panel slot Push the shade holder toward the passenger s side of the vehicle and place the tab in the driver s side trim panel slot Make sure the tab goes all the way in the slot Lightly pull on the shade holder to make sure it is secure Then pull the shade to the desired position and secure the shade posts in the appropriate retaining sockets yellow blue Cargo Tie Downs There are cargo tie downs in the rear cargo area that allow you to strap cargo in j and keep it from moving inside the vehicle When not using the tie downs flip them down out of the way Luggage Carrier Your vehicle has a luggage car
56. bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child A very young child s hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips as it should Instead the belt will likely be over the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force right on the child s abdomen which could cause serious or fatal injuries So be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint yellow blue Infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because an infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a frontal crash an infant in a rear facing restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the infant s body the back and shoulders A baby should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint This is so important that many hospitals today won t release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant restraint available for the baby s first trip in a motor vehicle 1 39 blue CAUTION Continued at only 25 mph 40 km h
57. be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that Both the owner s manual and the child restraint instructions are important so if either one of these is not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in a rear seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat Here s why yellow blue A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat but before you do always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat Wherever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure t
58. can work hard on mountain roads Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill If you don t shift down your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope yellow blue Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Don t swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert
59. dims to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark yellow blue The mirror also includes an eight point compass display in the upper right corner of the mirror face When on the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven The mirror also includes a display in the upper right corner of the mirror This can be used as a compass or to indicate outside air temperature 2 51 C cese pee C2 Temperature Display The temperature can be displayed by pressing the TEMP switch Pressing the TEMP switch once briefly will toggle the temperature reading on and off To alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and Celsius press and hold the TEMP switch for three seconds until the display shows only F or C Press and release the TEMP switch to toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings After five seconds of inactivity the display will return to normal in the temperature scale you have selected 2 52 yellow blue The normal display will show a temperature reading in degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius If an abnormal reading is displayed please consult your dealer Electrochromic Mirror Operation The TEMP side of the switch located at the bottom of the mirror also turns the electrochromic inside and outside mirrors on and off An indicator light located to the right of the TEMP switch will come on when the electrochromic mirrors are turned on To turn the mirrors on
60. driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs weren t done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts Drive it only with all the windows down to under your vehicle and ignite Don t park over blow out any CO and papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Have your vehicle fixed immediately 2 36 Running Your Engine While You re Parked It s better not to park with the engine running But if ever you have to here are some things to know Idling the engine with the air system control off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle see the earlier Caution under Engine Exhaust Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park in a garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Blizzard in the Index yellow blue It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you ve left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be
61. engine compartment The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the COLD mark or a little higher When your engine is warm the level should be at the HOT mark or a little higher 6 25 Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly With the coolant recovery tank you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank but be careful not to spill it 6 26 yellow blue You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine Power Steering Fluid When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired yellow blue How To Check Power Steering Fluid When the engine compartment is cool wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick wit
62. get it FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to come and go Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it 3 21 yellow blue To help avoid hearing loss or damage Care of Your Cassette Tape Player e Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If they aren t they may not operate NOTICE properly or may cause failure of the tape player Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every Before you add any sound equipment to your 50 hours of use Your radio may display CLN to indicate vehicle like a tape player CB radio mobile that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without telephone or two way radio be sure you can resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on add what you want If you can it s very the display your cassette tape play
63. handling discs Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge 3 24 yellow blue Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged If the mast should ever become slightly bent you can straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent as it might be by vandals you should replace it Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the cowl yellow blue Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions We ve also included many other useful tips on driving 4 2 Defensive Driving 4 30 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 3 Drunken Driving 4 33 City Driving 4 6 Control of a Vehicle 4 34 Freeway Driving 4 6 Braking 4 35 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4 9 Steering 4 36 Highway Hypnosis 4 11 Off Road Recovery 4 36 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 12 Passing 4 38 Winter Driving 4 13 Loss of Control 4 42 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4 14 Off Road Driving with Your 4 43 Loading Your Vehicle Four Wheel Drive Vehicle 4 45 Towing a Trailer 4 28 Driving at Night Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts in the Index yellow blue Defensive driving really means be ready for anything O
64. ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette 5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer s recommended cleaning time When the cleaning cassette has been ejected the cut tape detection feature is active again yellow blue You may also choose a non scrubbing action wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own A non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner The use of a non scrubbing action dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced 3 23 Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surface of a disc is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the signal surface when
65. includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs reimbursement up to 30 per day five days maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to 10 per day five day maximum may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained at actual cost up to a maximum of 30 00 per day supported by receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but i
66. injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Four wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in NEUTRAL N will allow the vehicle to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL N Always set your parking brake Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t move See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 37 Locking Rear Axle Your locking rear axle can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle Windows Power Windows The power window controls are located on each of the side doors 2 38 yellow blue The driver s door has a switch for the passenger windows as well Your power windows will work when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is present See Retained Accessory Power in the Index Push the rear of the switch with the power window symbol on it to lower the window Push the front of the switch with the power window symbol on it to raise the window The driver s window switch has an express down
67. it cools down yellow blue The coolant level should be at or above the COLD mark If it isn t you may have a leak in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system 5 11 Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Don t touch them If you do you can be burned Don t run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle NOTICE Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn t covered by your warranty NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant NOTICE Continued 5 12 yellow blue NOTICE Continued If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty If there seems to be no leak start the engine again See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down If it doesn t your vehicle needs service Turn off the engine How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank I
68. jololo o TRIP United States version shown Canadian similar Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going about how much fuel you have and many other things you ll need to know to drive safely and economically 2 70 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada Tamper Resistant Odometer Your odometer is tamper resistant The odometer will show silver lines between the numbers if someone tries to turn it back You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed Laws vary as to the procedure that must be followed so check with your state or provincial vehicle registration office But generally if the new odometer can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer then it must be But if it can t then it s set at zero and a label must be put on the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed yellow blue Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero To reset the trip odometer fully press the reset button located near the trip odometer readout If the reset button is not fully press
69. occurs first OO e See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 29 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Inspect Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR system as described in the service manual An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Inspect Evaporative Control System Check all fuel and
70. off and your headlamps will change to the reduced brightness of DRL To idle your vehicle with the DRL off set the parking brake The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it 2 47 Fog Lamps Your vehicle has fog lamps Use them for better vision in foggy or misty conditions Your parking lamps and or low beam headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work The fog lamp switch is located to the right of the instrument panel cluster Press the ribbed top part of the switch to turn the fog lamps on Press the bottom of the switch to turn them off An indicator light will illuminate in the switch when the fog lamps are on Remember fog lamps alone will not give off as much light as your headlamps Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turning on your headlamps 2 48 yellow blue Fog lamps will go off whenever your high beam headlamps come on When the high beams are off the fog lamps will come on again Headlamp Delay Your vehicle is equipped with a headlamp delay feature that holds the headlamps on for a short period of time after the ignition is turned off VDO ce CZ The HEADLAMP DELAY button is located on the lower left side of the inside rearview mirror The length of time that the headlamps stay on after the ignition is turned off can be adjusted by pressing and holding the HEADLAMP DELAY bu
71. or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them 6 39 Inflation Tire Pressure The Certification Tire label which is on the rear edge of the driver s door or on the incomplete vehicle document in the cab shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km You can operate some vehicles at reduced inflation pressures only when you ll be carrying reduced loads On those vehicles the minimum cold inflation pressures for a typical reduced load are printed on the Improved Ride Tire Pressure label located on the driver s door Weigh the vehicle to find the load on each tire and see the label for the minimum cold inflation pressures for that load 6 40 yellow blue NOTICE Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right It s not If your tires don t have enough air underinflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy If your tires have too much air overinflation you can get the following Unusual wear Bad handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards When to Check Check your tires
72. press and hold the TEMP switch for eight seconds The mirrors will darken and remain dark until the button is released To turn the mirrors off press and hold the TEMP switch for eight seconds Compass Operation Press the COMP switch once briefly to turn the compass on or off When the ignition and the compass feature are on the compass will show two character boxes for approximately two seconds After two seconds the mirror will display the compass heading Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Compass Calibration If after five seconds the display does not show a compass heading N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item If the letter C should ever appear in the compass window the mirror may need calibration The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways Drive the vehicle in two circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction or yellow blue Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after several turns the compass will become calibrated and will display a direction Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eigh
73. products may damage the paint finish and tires Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop yellow blue Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed accelerated corrosion rust can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle This damage ca
74. re driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes Here s what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels yellow The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember Anti lock doesn t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you won t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Don t pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal Your anti lock brakes work at all times whether you are in two wheel drive or four wheel drive Braking in Emergencies With anti lock you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking
75. selection The SEEK button is inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is in use While listening to a CD press the up arrow to hear the next selection on the CD Press the down arrow to go back to the start of the current selection if more than eight seconds have played The SEEK button is inactive in the CD mode if the remote CD player if equipped or the CD changer is in use SCAN Press and hold SEEK until the radio goes into SCAN mode SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press SEEK again The SCAN function is inactive if the AM FM mode on the front radio is in use 3 13 P SET PROG The front passengers must be listening to something different for each of these functions to work Press this button to seek through the preset radio stations set on your primary radio pushbuttons When a cassette tape is playing press this button to go to the other side of the tape When a CD is playing in the CD changer press this button to select a disc TAPE CD Press this button to switch between the tape remote CD if equipped and console mounted CD changer if all are loaded Press AM FM to return to the radio when a cassette tape or CD is playing The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening 3 14 yellow blue Remote Compact Disc Player If Equipped If you have this op
76. slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid 4 14 yellow blue Off Road Driving with Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle This off road guide is for vehicles that have four wheel drive Also see Anti Lock Brakes in the Index Off road driving can be great fun But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself Off roading means you ve left the great North American road system behind Traffic lanes aren t marked Curves aren t banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill In short you ve gone right back to nature Off road driving involves some new skills And that s why it s very important that you read this guide You ll find many driving tips and suggestions These will help make yo
77. stop when going uphill don t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal This could overheat and damage the transmission Use your brakes or shift into PARK P to hold your vehicle in position on a hill 2 27 Four Wheel Drive Your vehicle has four wheel drive You can send your engine s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction To get the most satisfaction out of four wheel drive you must be familiar with its operation Read the section that follows before using four wheel drive You should use 2HI for most normal driving conditions NOTICE Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle s drivetrain 2 28 yellow blue Front Axle Locking Feature The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when you shift the transfer case Some delay for the axle to lock or unlock is normal Automatic Transfer Case Recommended Transfer Case Settings Transfer Case Settings AUTO Driving Conditions 4WD 4LO Nomad VES Variable 1 Jys Severe 1L dyes Extreme o lo io wesh Vehicle n Tw ft 1 YES See Recreational Vehicle Towing or Towing Your Vehicle in the Index for further information The transfer case switches are below and to the left of the climate controls Use these switches to shift into and out of four wheel drive You can choose among four driving settings
78. take the forces That s why safety belts Even if you re in a vehicle that has air safety belts make such good sense bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That s true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions or the safety belts 1 13 Q If Pm a good driver and I never drive far from home why should I wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you re in an accident even one that isn t your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver doesn t protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone 1 14 yellow blue How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see the part of this manual called Children Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We ll start with the driver position Driver Position This part describes the driver s restraint system Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here s how t
79. the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps and the instrument panel lights To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off set the parking brake while the ignition is off Then start the vehicle The automatic headlamp system will stay off until you release the parking brake The headlamp switch can always be used to turn on the regular lamps As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Headlamps On Reminder A chime will sound when your headlamps are turned on and your ignition is in OFF LOCK or ACCESSORY Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset yellow blue The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when the ignition is on the headlamp switch is off the parking brake is released and it is bright enough outside and the automatic headlamps are off When the DRL are on only your headlamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on Your instrument panel won t be lit up either When it begins to get dark your DRL will turn off Your headlamps will come on automatically When it begins to get bright the regular lamps will go
80. the accessory package other devices controlled by radio frequency such as home office lighting and security systems 2 63 The transmitter will learn and transmit the frequencies of most current transmitters and is powered by your vehicle s battery and charging system This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 2 64 yellow blue Programming the Transmitter Do not use the transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door you are programming Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 If you have not previously prog
81. the belt before you fold a rear seat down Center Passenger Position yellow To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug When you sit in the center seating position you have a ds lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap l It the d l part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt isn t long enough a a pias gnd a a uer pem see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle 1 38 yellow blue Smaller Children and Babies Children who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed This is true even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air
82. the inability to see in dim light and aren t even aware of it 4 29 yellow blue Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you can t stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction isn t as good as on dry roads m T OS 9 And if your tires don t have much tread left you ll get even less traction It s always wise to go slower and be Wi My IN H j My M i M M f cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The ye Wy surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are d Hl pasa tuned for driving on dry pavement The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts 4 30 Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you can t try to slow down before you hit them yellow blue W
83. the keyless entry system You can also use your key but your vehicle has a theft deterrent system If it is armed unlocking and opening the door this way might set off the alarm See Theft Deterrent System in the Index From the inside to lock the door slide the lever down To unlock the door slide the lever up yellow blue Power Door Locks Press the side of the power door lock switch marked LOCK on either front door to lock all the doors at once Press the ribbed side of the switch to unlock all the doors at once The power door locks will operate at any time without the ignition being on The manual switch on each rear door works only that door s lock It won t lock or unlock all of the doors that s a safety feature Operating the power locks may affect the theft deterrent system See Theft Deterrent System in the Index On the passenger side of the rear panel door or tailgate there is a power lock switch which can be used to lock or unlock all of the doors On vehicles with panel doors if the power lock switch is pressed with the panel doors open all of the doors will lock three seconds after the panel doors are closed If the panel doors are closed the vehicle doors will lock when a power door lock switch is pressed The theft deterrent system will not re arm after the panel doors are closed unless the power lock switch is pressed first yellow blue Child Security Locks
84. the shock sensor had triggered a two minute alarm If the red light is flashing three times every two seconds the system is armed and there was an intrusion that sounded the alarm Horn chirps and parking lamp flashes can be set to your choice Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Locking If all the doors are closed locking the vehicle with the transmitter will immediately arm the system The horn will chirp twice and the headlamps and parking lamps will flash confirming that the system is armed if that mode is selected If any door is open when the transmitter LOCK button is pressed the system goes into an armed wait mode waiting for the doors to close Once they are closed the system will arm and the headlamps and parking lamps will flash If the tailgate or panel doors are open or ajar at the time the system is arming the headlamps and parking lamps flash once Power Door Lock Switch Locking If any door is open when the power door lock switch is pressed the system goes into an armed wait mode waiting for the doors to close Once they are closed the system will arm and the parking lamps will flash If both of the doors are closed when the power lock switch is pressed the system assumes you are inside the vehicle so it will not arm Locking the doors by using the manual door locks will not arm the system yellow blue Passive Arming If the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter or the power door lock switch is press
85. to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have an anti lock braking system you ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock in the Index Allow greater following distance on any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that s covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can t reach around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you re actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers 4 39 yellow blue If You re Caught in a Blizzard Tiea red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you ve been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you have no blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay wit
86. vapor lines and hoses for proper hook up routing and condition Check that the purge valve works properly if equipped Replace as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT 7 30 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 67 500 Miles 112 500 km LE qd Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 31 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 82 500 Miles 137 500 km o
87. vehicle won t move you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle at the opposite end A M p yellow blue The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire 5 19 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools FUTT Y M y LR VOLESSE The equipment you ll need is located in the rear cargo area The spare tire is located under the rear of the vehicle 5 20 yellow blue To open the jack cover turn the wing nut counterclockwise and take the cover off To take the jack out turn the wing head bolt counterclockwise and take it and the retainer off Take the jack and storage box out and take the tools out of the box Your vehicle may have a pair of emergency gloves secured to the jack You can use them when changing the tire or during other emergency situations Remember to replace them with the jack so you will have them if needed later The spare tire is stored under the vehicle in an underbody carrier A Hoist Assembly B Hoist Shaft C Ratchet D Jack Handle Retainer Valve Stem Pointed Down Spare Tire yellow blue Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire 1 One side of the ratchet has an UP marking The other side has a DOWN marking Assemble the ratchet to the hook near the end of the jack handle as illustrated with the DOWN marking facin
88. you park your vehicle and open the driver s door you ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you Always do this Your steering wheel will be locked and so will your ignition and transmission Also remember to lock the doors Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot close all windows and lock your vehicle Remember to keep your valuables out of sight Put them in a storage area or take them with you yellow blue Parking Lots If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle it s best to lock it up and take your keys But what if you have to leave your ignition key What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle Put your valuables in a storage area like your glove box Lock all the doors except the driver s Theft Deterrent System Your vehicle has a theft deterrent alarm system Once armed the system will sound the horn and flash the parking lamps if the vehicle is tampered with Opening the doors may activate the alarm See Disarming the System later in this section for further information on turning the system off 2 13 Shock Sensor A shock sensor triggers the alarm when it detects a blow to your vehicle It is located in the center floor console There are two levels of alarms via the shock sensor two horn blasts and the headlamp parking lamps flash for non threatening blows to the vehicle or a full two minute alarm for hard
89. 00 AM 6 00 PM EST information within 30 days of delivery On returns a re stocking fee may be applied FAX Orders Only 1 313 865 5927 against the original order Car amp Light Truck Transmission Unit Repair Owner s Manual In Portfolio Owner s Manual Without Portfolio LC NOTE Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name and also the Check or Money name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent Order payable to Michigan Purchasers Mail completed order form to Helm Inc USA funds add 6 sales tax HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 only do not send cash Jj For purchases outside U S A please write to the above address for quotation C U S Order Processing 5 00 C MasterCard Canadian Postage See Note Below CUSTOMER S NAME ATTENTION i Discover Account STREET ADDRESS NO P O BOX NUMBERS Number qm Check here if your billing address CITY STATE ZIP CODE Date mo yr address shown DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO AREA CODE CUSTOMER SIGNATURE GM GMC ORD99 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents obligation Allow ample time for delivery are to make checks payable in U S funds To cover Canadian postage add 11 50 plus the U S order processing yellow blue f NOTES yellow blue Section 9 Index Air Ba Beis sais khe R
90. 155 000 km pop Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 96 000 Miles 160 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY cea p SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first E See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 22 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 99 000 Miles 165 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILEAGE f Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first Edo See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Inspect spark plug wires An Em
91. 2 1 800 462 8782 Roadside Assistance prompt to reach a qualified representative who can assist you yellow blue Your Roadside Assistance representative will ask for the following information when your call is received Vehicle Identification Number VIN Name and home address Telephone number and location from which you are calling Location license plate number and color of your GMC truck Mileage of vehicle and description of problem Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week 365 days a year including weekends and holidays Should you have any questions about roadside assistance call the GMC Roadside Assistance Center or contact your dealer Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty GMC reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1 800 268 6800 for emergency services Courtesy Transportation GMC has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealerships are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support prog
92. 2HI This setting is used for driving in most situations Your front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive This setting also provides the best fuel economy AUTO 4WD This setting is ideal for use when road conditions are variable When driving your vehicle in AUTO 4WD the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s yellow blue power is sent only to the rear wheels When the vehicle senses a loss of traction the system will automatically engage four wheel drive Driving in this mode results in lower fuel economy than 2HI 4HI Use 4HI when you need extra traction such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations This setting also engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle 4LO This setting also engages your front axle and delivers extra torque You may never need 4LO It sends maximum power to all four wheels You might choose 4LO if you are driving off road in deep sand deep mud deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL See Parking Brake in the Index 2 29 NEUTRAL Shift the vehicle s transfer case to neutral only when towing your vehicle See Recreational Vehicle Towing or Towing Your Vehicle in the Index for more information Indicator light
93. 3 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts Here s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt 1 34 1 yellow blue Remove the guide from its storage clip on the side of the seatback yellow blue 2 Slide the guide under and past the belt The elastic 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The cord must be under the belt Then place the guide elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into on top the slots of the guide 1 35 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions earlier in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder 1 36 yellow blue To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides Slide the guide onto the storage clip Make sure you remove the comfort guide from
94. ELL PRICE 50 00 SERVICE BULLETINS Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 OWNER S INFORMATION Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 15 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 10 00 CURRENT amp PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle OR ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover yellow blue ORDER TOLL FREE Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt Please allow adequate time for postal NOTE For Credit Card Holders Only service If further information is needed write to the address shown below or call 1 800 551 4123 1 800 551 4123 Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return Monday Friday 8
95. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range your engine could be damaged The engine oil fill cap is located on the driver s side engine valve cover Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you re through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the Starburst symbol This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol 6 12 yellow blue If you change your own oil be sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container If you have your oil changed for you be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle as shown in the following chart RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE DIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE HOT FOR THIS WEATHER SYMBOL SAE 10W 30 SAE 5W 30 PREFERRED COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED yellow blue As shown in the chart SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle However you can use SAE 10W
96. Index in back of the manual It s an alphabetical list of what s in the manual and the page number where you ll find it yellow blue Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you don t you or others could be hurt iii You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Don t Don t do this or Don t let this happen Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this book you will find these notices NOTICE These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle iv yellow blue In the notice area we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE yellow blue Vehicle Symbols These are some of the symbols you may find on you
97. LED Light Emitting Diode Theft Deterrent System Indicator Cellular Telephone If Equipped For more information on these components please see the Index for that item Armrest Storage Compartment Your vehicle has a center armrest storage compartment in the rear seat Other Storage Compartments Your vehicle includes a number of storage compartments for storage of often used items Your vehicle has a storage pocket on each of the front doors You can use the pocket to store a variety of small items 2 57 Convenience Net Your vehicle has a convenience net which is used to keep small loads like grocery bags in place during sharp turns or quick starts and stops The net is not designed for larger heavier loads Itis stored in a pouch attached at the driver s side of the vehicle You can also unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you re not using it Cargo Security Shade An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver You or others could be injured If you remove the cover always store it outside of the vehicle When you put it back always be sure that it is securely reattached 2 58 yellow blue Your vehicle has a cargo security shade You can use it to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle To use the shade pull the shade handle toward the rear of the vehicle Latch the shade posts into the retaining sockets on the cargo
98. Part No 1052884 1 pint 1050017 1 quart or equivalent Automatic DEXRON III Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Parking Brake Cable Guides Power Steering System Chassis Lubrication 7 41 USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Front Axle SAE 80W 90 Axle Lubricant GM Part No 1052271 or equivalent Rear Axle SAE 80W 90 Axle Lubricant Locking use only GM Part No 1052271 Differential Do not add friction modifier Automatic Transfer Case Fluid GM Part No 12378396 Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Automatic Transfer Case Front Axle Propshaft Spline and Universal Joints Hood Latch Assembly Secondary Latch Pivots Spring Anchor and Release Pawl Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol GM Part No 12346293 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB 7 42 yellow blue USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Hood and Door Multi Purpose Lubricant Hinges Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Body Door Hinge Pins Tailgate Hinge and Linkage Folding Seat and Fuel Door Hinge Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent
99. REO SES 2 70 Fuse Block i o cr etre bre EE Gre y 6 57 Interior Lamps 20 0 0 cee eee ee 2 49 EET CREDERE 5 20 Jump Starting i os caed ette den whee wertieacnests 5 3 Key Lock Cylinder Service 0 000005 7 36 Keyless Entry System 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 2 6 Keys T aoe 2 2 Lae Certification Tir eoe ese vec stead occk ing eae ERES 4 43 Service Parts Identification lusus 6 55 Tire Loading Information 0 4 43 Vehicle Identification Number 6 55 LAMPS 5 sende e aia Fiere xcd pce 2 46 Automatie vede Rye da err aae duet eA 2 47 Cleaning Exterior sss eik ies a PEIPER EEG 6 51 Delay RM Lm 2 48 Dome accord en Sede eed es eren dre pns 2 49 EXxterlOF creec uE exe Y ke RES RESP Rad oa dees 2 46 n iiescccee a a ance eee bes a Dae 2 48 6 36 6 61 IntetlOE 5 eee sexe ore E ia tees 2 49 On Reminder 0 0 cece eee eee 2 47 Leaving Your Vehicle 0 00000 eee eee 2 6 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running 2 34 Lighter 4 eR e eR RE UR CER ees ars 2 61 Lights Air Bag Readiness 00 00 1 25 2 73 Anti Lock Brake System Warning 2 15 4 7 Brake System Warning 0 0 000000 2 74 Charging Warning System usse 2 73 Check Gages iud esie terc eei dme tee 2 81 Daytime Running Lamps Indicator 2 81 Headlamp High Beam Indicator
100. Unplug battery with a negative ground system unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or accessory power outlets Turn off all lamps that aren t needed as well as radios This will avoid NOTICE sparks and help save both batteries And it could save your radio If the other system isn t a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged NOTICE 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles aren t touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you don t want You wouldn t be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems If you leave your radio on it could be badly damaged The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL N before setting the parking brake Be sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL N 4 Open the hoods and locate the batteries Find the positive and negative terminals on each battery Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You don t need to add water to the ACDelco Freedom
101. Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear and cracking See Wiper Blade Check in Section 7 of this manual under Part B Owner Checks and Services for more information yellow blue Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways For proper type and length see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts in the Index Here s how to remove the Shephard s Hook type Poorly maintained and improperly used tires To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly are dangerous 1 Lift the wiper arm and rotate the blade until it is Overloading your tires can cause overheating facing away from the windshield as a result of too much friction You could 2 Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly have an air out and a serious accident See toward the driver s side of the vehicle Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident Tires could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended 3 Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2 Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions pressure Tire pressure should be checked about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see when your tires are cold your GMC Warranty booklet for details Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured
102. You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving however it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on yellow blue If you manually select SECOND 2 the transmission will drive in second gear You may use this feature for reducing torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the selector lever is put in FIRST 1 while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission won t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough NOTICE If your rear wheels can t rotate don t try to drive This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object You could damage your transmission Also if you
103. a rere e hppxI se 4 53 Uniform Quality Grading 04 6 44 Transfer Case iier daiaire EEE E haere 6 21 7 41 Used Wheel Replacement usse 6 46 Transfer Case Automatic llle esee 2 28 Wear Indicators 2 0 0 nuon ccc ee eee 6 42 Transmission Fluid Automatic 6 17 7 41 Wheel Replacement 0 0 000008 6 45 Transmitter Keyless Entry 0 00 2 6 When It s Time for New 0 00 e eee 6 42 Transmitter Universal 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 2 63 Top Sttap esie cet Rem re Re rm RR E EE EE dae 1 46 Transportation Courtesy 0 00 ee eee eee 8 8 Torque Lock ss se nmm mH Rhe km 2 35 Trip Odometer l RR emeseIR RR RPPPES 2 71 Torque Wheel Nut 000002 5 29 6 63 TEY USES 5 22 02 ise Ser aee REIR atari teo dishes 8 4 Towing Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals 2 40 From the Front ssis seco esee m n hens 5 8 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer 4 51 From the REAL 22e enigingen ia gem engine hy 5 8 Tale sese Ads Underbody Maintenance Lise 6 53 Your Vehicle 6 0 cece cece teens 5 8 Underhood Fuse Relay Center see eee 6 59 Universal Transmitter 0 00 00 eese 2 63 9 11 yellow blue Vehicle Window Lock ni viicas epee e Rete ene eat 2 38 Control 2 2 eR e eme re REI E ORE QS 4 6 Windows ier Meee eed ees eee ERE ERES 2 38 Damage Warnings 00 cece eee e
104. ad as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns NOTICE Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drive
105. ad of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration don t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked yellow blue In any emergency don t give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels aren t rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs 4 13 Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you ll want to
106. after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It doesn t take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Don t overfill NOTICE We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON IIL because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON 9 m is not covered by your new vehicle warranty After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 6 20 yellow blue Rear Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Four Wheel Drive Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how of
107. ailable for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 When calling from the United States please dial 1 905 644 3063 8 5 Roadside Assistance GMC s Roadside Assistance provides stranded owners with over the phone roadside repairs location of the nearest GMC dealer or the following special services Flat Tire Change Installation of spare tire will be covered at no charge customer is responsible for repair or replacement of tire 8 6 yellow blue Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the customer to get to the nearest service station up to 4 00 will be covered Jump Start No start situations which require a battery jump start will be covered at no charge Lock Out Replacement keys or locksmith service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle Delivery of the replacement key will be covered at no charge within 10 miles 16 km Emergency Towing Service Towing to the nearest GMC dealer for warranty related disablements will be covered Deluxe Trip Routing Custom made computerized highlighted maps using the most direct or scenic route are provided free of charge Maps include points of in
108. aintenance 7 500 Miles 12 500 km o Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 77 2 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 22 500 Miles 37 500 km LE qd Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See foo
109. aintenance Services 7 4 Short Trip City Definition 0 7 5 Short Trip City Intervals lesseeesess 7 5 Maintenance Underbody 004 6 53 Maintenance When Trailer Towing 4 53 Malfunction Indicator Lamp 04 2 76 Methanol 4 eese Re obe eret neta 6 4 yellow blue MIITOIS i ore bee Oo eG XR UR e gra 2 51 Paint Spotting Chemical 0000 6 53 Convex Outside iis soc vecta Ree n E 2 55 Park aoe Electrochromic Day Night Rearview with Automatic Transmission 0 0c cee eee 2 25 Compass Temperature Display Headlamp Delay NT 2 51 a Into i dope pr us o DA Rob quede oe EUR A RC Ec TR a Electrochromic Heated Outside Rearview 2 54 3 7 P m ting Out Of seen 35 Inside Rearview 0 eee eee 2 51 ADE At Night esc canniceadiactn suave EE E ae edu 2 13 Power Remote Control 00000 c eee eee 2 54 Brake e nente a E p d A A E KLE n 2 32 MMT ursa isle eres treed dre Ge IS ER ree Dur RE 6 4 Brake Mechanism Check sss suse 7 38 Model Reference 0 cee eee eee vi ecc TEM 2 13 Mountain Roads 00 0 eee eee eee 4 36 Over Things That Burn 04 2 36 Multifunction Lever 00 0000 c eee eee eee 2 40 With a Trailer o Mad eens ade hpc etes 4 52 Passenger Position 0 0 0 0 e ee eee eee eee 1 23 PASSING gt iy cated epe ua ob deo leis pct e
110. airs may be necessary even if the belt wasn t being used at the time of the collision If an air bag inflates you ll need to replace air bag system parts See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section 1 57 yellow blue f NOTES yellow blue Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle and information on starting shifting and braking Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly and what to do if you have a problem Keys Door Locks Keyless Entry System Rear Doors Theft Theft Deterrent System Feature Customization Passlock New Vehicle Break In Ignition Positions Starting Your Engine Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped Automatic Transmission Operation Four Wheel Drive Parking Brake Shifting Into Park P Shifting Out of Park P Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Lovey a Ear e PoP yy Pp yyy WWWWWNNNNNNN RRR DAWN DANDNMWNAANBNKTODAWWe 2 37 2 38 2 38 2 39 2 39 2 40 2 46 2 49 2 51 2 55 2 61 2 63 2 63 2 67 2 67 2 68 2 70 2 72 Running Your Engine While You re Parked Locking Rear Axle Windows Horn Tilt Wheel Multifunction Lever Exterior Lamps Interior Lamps Mirrors Storage Compartments Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Sun Visors Universal Transmitter Cellular Telephone If Equipped OnStar System
111. alls or is about to stall and I can t make it up the hill A If this happens there are some things you should do and there are some things you must not do First here s what you should do Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake If your engine is still running shift the transmission to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R If your engine has stopped running you ll need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P and restart the engine Then shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE R As you are backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It s best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover yellow blue Here are some things you must not do if you stall or are Q Suppose after stalling I try to back down the hill about to stall when going up a hill and decide I just can t do it What should I do Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into A Set the parki
112. an cloth Rub with a clean damp cloth to remove dirt You may have to do it more than once Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don t get them off quickly Use a clean cloth and a vinyl leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner See your dealer for this product yellow blue Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe polish on leather Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately If dirt is allowed to work into the finish it can harm the leather Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish Cleaning Wood Panels Use a clean cloth moistened in warm soapy water use mild dish washing soap Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth Cleaning Speaker Covers Vacuum around a speaker cover gently so th
113. an deed 2 47 bin pp Pr EN 6 56 Hearing Impaired Customer Assistance 8 4 Heated Front Seats 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 1 3 Heated Rear Seats 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eee 1 8 Heating cesi RR ed gites 3 2 3 5 High Beam Headlamps 0 0 eee cues 2 41 Highway Hypnosis 0 00 eee eee eee ee 4 36 Hill and Mountain Roads 0 00005 4 36 Hitches Trailer 0 0 eee 4 48 yellow blue Hood Checking Things Under 6 8 Hood Release 52 eR Ref cake eae ES 6 9 OEM 15er iio etd e nad e Meteo a D EIU Pa NE E 2 39 Hydroplaning ren area Sod boas eedem eet 4 32 Ignition POSITIONS 5 ng CHR yc ondes 2 21 Ignition Transmission Lock Check 7 38 Inflation Tire 1 esce entm tnt en 6 40 Inside Rearview Mirror 00 0 e eee ee eee 2 51 Inspections fiji ces cea e mee he bes wee a ee Hee 7 39 Brake System 00 cece eee eee eee 7 40 Drive Axle pe eiria tie ect he eae ie SR tete teg 7 40 Engine Cooling System sess 7 39 Exhaust System 0 000 000 eee eee eee 7 39 SEENE Aiaia ence Mid eh RR Reb e ene 7 39 Suspension zio rer e eda ee IP EE 7 39 Throttle System ceo bh bm 7 39 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive 7 40 Instrument Panel 00 0 0 cece eee eee 2 68 Brightness Control 00 0000 c eee eee 2 49 Cleaning sete e send ener Gil net de erect 6 49 Cl slef i22 eer ERE Mer a eDEeSP
114. and Tires MODEL DESCRIPTION TORQUE K 1500 6 bolts 14 mm 140 Ib ft 190 N m Tire Pressure See the Certification Tire label on the rear edge of the driver s door or the incomplete vehicle document in the cab 6 63 yellow blue Cooling System Capacity Approximate After refill the level must be rechecked See Cooling System in the Index ENGINE VIN QTY VORTEC 5700 V8 R 17 5 Quarts 16 5 L Crankcase Capacity Approximate After refill the level must be rechecked See Engine Oil in the Index ENGINE VIN QUANTITY WITH FILTER VORTEC 5700 V8 R 5 Quarts 4 8 L TOil filter should be changed at every oil change Fuel Tank Capacity Approximate Quantity 30 Gallons 113 L Air Conditioning Refrigerants Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant be sure the proper refrigerant is used If you re not sure ask your dealer See refrigerant charge label under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements 6 64 yellow blue Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing and are subject to change If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was built or if you have any questions please contact your GM truck dealer Engine VIN Oil Filter Air Cleaner Filter Spark
115. ant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 57 000 Miles 95 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote 7 16 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR system inspection as described in the service manual An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Conduct evaporative control system inspection Check all fuel and vapor lines and hose
116. arefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service yellow blue Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light S With the anti lock brake system this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on ANTI for several seconds LOCK That s normal If the light stays on or comes on when you re driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light isn t on you still have brakes but you don t have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you don t have anti lock brakes and there s a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light earlier in this section The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 2 75 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage shows the engine coolant temperature It also provides an i
117. art the engine or comes on when you are driving your air bag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem yellow blue Charging System Warning Light The charging system warning light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition before starting the engine as a check to show you it is working After the engine starts the light should go out If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with your charging system It could indicate a problem with the generator drive belt or some other charging system problem Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery If you must drive a short distance with this light on it helps to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and the air conditioner 2 73 Voltmeter When your engine is not running but the ignition is in the RUN position this gage shows your battery s state of charge in DC volts When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicl
118. asolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system allowing your emission control system to function properly Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel In addition gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier NOTICE Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Don t use it It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage wouldn t be covered under your warranty yellow blue Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn t be covered by your warranty To check on fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you ll be driving You can also write us at the following address for advice Just tell us where you re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number VIN General Motors Overseas Distribution Corpora
119. at the speaker won t be damaged Clean spots with just water and mild soap 6 49 Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Don t use abrasive cleaners on glass because they may cause scratches Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window since they may have to be scraped off later If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window an electric defogger element may be damaged Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid 6 50 yellow blue Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner Bon Ami Powder non scratching glass cleaning powder GM Part No 1050011 The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and
120. ating temperature and shortens the time it takes the heater to reach full output For more information see Engine Coolant Heater in the Index yellow blue Ventilation System For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed use VENT to direct outside air through your vehicle Air will flow through the instrument panel outlets Your vehicle s ventilation system supplies outside air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving With the side windows closed air will flow into the front air inlet grilles through the vehicle and out the air exhaust valves Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or the air conditioning fan is running unless you have the recirculation button pushed in For more information on the recirculation button see Air Conditioning earlier in this section 3 5 yellow blue Ventilation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows When you enter a vehicle in cold weather turn the blower fan to HI for a few moments before driving This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle Your vehicle has air outle
121. ature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded
122. b all the way up to the second notch In this position the dome lamps will remain on whether the doors are opened or closed 2 49 DOME OVERRIDE You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button located below the parking headlamp knob to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when the doors are opened or remain off To turn the lamps off press the button once With the button in this position the dome lamps will remain off when the doors are open To return the lamps to automatic operation press the button again and return it to the out position With the button in this position the dome lamps will come on when you open the door 2 50 yellow blue Reading Lamps Your vehicle has reading lamps Press the button next to the lamp to turn the lamp on The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction you want Press the button again to turn the lamp off Battery Rundown Protection This feature shuts off the dome courtesy vanity reading glove box and underhood lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off This will keep your battery from running down Mirrors Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror with Compass Temperature Display and Headlamp Delay Your vehicle has electrochromic inside and outside rearview mirrors Your vehicle also has a headlamp delay feature See Headlamp Delay in the Index for more information When on an electrochromic mirror automatically
123. bags Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see the part of this manual called Children and see the caution labels on the sunvisors and the right front passenger s safety belt There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument AIR panel which shows B AG AIR BAG The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Air Bag Readiness Light in the Index for more information yellow blue How the Air Bag System Works Where are the air bags The driver s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 25 The right front passenger s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side 1 26 yellow blue If something is between an occupant and an air bag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear Don t put anything between an occupant and an air bag and don t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering When should an air bag inflate An air bag is designed to inflate in a
124. battery installed in every new GM vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you don t explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Don t get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately yellow blue Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive and negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part Don t connect positive to negative or you ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running yellow Don tlet the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Now connect the black negative cable to the good battery s negative cable 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery Don t let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable doesn t go to the yellow blue dead bat
125. be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 7 36 yellow blue Automatic Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level add if needed See Automatic Transmission in the Index A fluid loss may indicate a problem Check the system and repair if needed At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all body hood and body door hinges body door hinge pins hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor and release pawl rear compartment hinges tailgate hinge tailgate linkage outer tailgate handle pivot points latches fuel door fuel door hinge locks and folding seat hardware Part D tells you what to use More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment yellow blue Starter Switch Check Brake Transmission Shift Interlock BTSI Check When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake see Parking Brake in the Index if necessary and the regular brak
126. belt even if you have air bags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Air bags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts All air bags even Next Generation air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don t replace them Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something They aren t designed to inflate at all in rollover rear side or low speed frontal crashes And for unrestrained occupants Next Generation air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there s an air bag for that person 1 23 Air bags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you re too close to an inflating air bag it could seriously injure you This is true even with Next Generation frontal air bags Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with Next Generation air bags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle 1 24 yellow blue Children who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed This is true even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air
127. bend or break but not so loose that it drags on the ground The technician can use the following color code chart when connecting the wiring harness to your trailer Brown Rear Lamps Yellow Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal Dark Green Right Stoplamp and Turn Signal White Heavy Gauge Ground Light Green Back up Lamps White Light Gauge Center High Mounted Stop Lamp If Equipped Blue Auxiliary Electric Trailer Brake Circuit If Equipped Orange Fused Auxiliary Circuit If Equipped Store the harness in its original place Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it won t be damaged yellow blue f NOTES 4 55 yellow blue f NOTES yellow blue Section 5 Problems On The Road Here you ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road 5 2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5 11 5 2 Other Warning Devices 5 1 5 3 Jump Starting 5 18 5 8 Towing Your Vehicle 5 19 5 9 Engine Overheating 5 32 Cooling System Engine Fan Noise If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow 5 1 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off yellow blue m A Press the button on the top of the steering column all the way down to make your front and rear turn signal Y lamps flash on and off Your hazard warning flashe
128. blue Be sure to keep the original hand held transmitter in case you need to erase and reprogram the universal transmitter Operating the Transmitter Press and hold the appropriate button on the universal transmitter The red light comes on while the signal is being transmitted The effective transmission range of the universal transmitter may differ from the hand held transmitter and from one channel to another Erasing Channels To erase all three programmed channels hold down the two outside buttons until the red light begins to flash Individual channels cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed using the procedure for programming the transmitter explained earlier 2 65 Training a Garage Door Opener with a Rolling Code Feature If you programmed the universal transmitter but the garage door will not open and if your garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 your garage door may have a security feature that changes the code of your garage door opener every time it is opened or closed To determine if your garage door opener has this rolling code feature press the appropriate button on the universal transmitter that was programmed If the red light flashes rapidly for one to two seconds then turns solid your garage door opener has this feature To program a garage door opener with the rolling code feature do the following 1 Program your hand held transmitter to the universal transmitter by fo
129. buckle up your safety belts can t do their job when you re reclined like this The shoulder belt can t do its job because it won t be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can t do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly yellow blue Head Restraints Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash The head restraints tilt forward and rearward also Pull firmly on the top of the head restraint to position it to your liking Rear Seats If a head restraint is not installed on the seatback or stored in the vehicle properly it could be thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden maneuver People in the vehicle could be injured Remove the head restraints only when you need to fold the seat and be sure that the head restraints are stored securely in the appropriate holes at the rear of the lower seat cushion When the seat is returned to the passenger position be sure the head restraints are installed properly 1 6 yellow b
130. calding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 5 14 yellow blue How to Add Coolant to the Radiator 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap but now push down as you turn it Remove the pressure cap 1 You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops Don t press down while turning the pressure cap If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 5 15 yellow 3 Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL 4 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the coolant mixture up to the base of the filler neck COLD mark See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mixture 5 Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank but leave the radiator pressure cap off yellow 6 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the 8 Then replace the pressure cap At any time during upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out fo
131. can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes 4 41 yellow blue Recreational Vehicle Towing Four Wheel Drive Vehicles There may be times when you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for use at your destination Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for recreational vehicle towing Follow the instructions for the towing equipment Shifting the transfer case into NEUTRAL N can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P for an automatic transmission You or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL N 4 42 Use the following procedure to correctly tow your vehicle on all four wheels 1 2 3 Firmly set the parking brake Place the transmission in PARK P Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle With the engine running shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL N See Four Wheel Drive in the Index for the proper procedure to select the neutral position for your vehicle Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle Tum the ignition to OFF The OFF position unlocks the steering column and reduces battery drain Unlocking the steering column will allow the proper movement of the front whe
132. cator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N After 30 seconds the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen Shifting Out of 4LO To shift from 4LO to 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N and the engine running The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch You must wait for the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear If the 4AHI AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4HI AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N Shifting to Neutral To shift the transfer case to neutral first make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll Setthe parking brake Start the vehicle Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle Put the transmission in NEUTRAL N Shift the transfer case to 2HI Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO buttons for 10 seconds The red NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case shift to neutral is com
133. ccess the fuse block You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor The fuse extractor is mounted to the fuse block access door To remove fuses if you don t have a fuse extractor hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out You may have spare fuses attached to the inside of the fuse block access door These can be used to replace a bad fuse However make sure that it is the correct amperage 6 57 Fuse Circuit Breaker 1 6 58 Usage Stop TCC Switch Buzzer CHMSL Hazard Lamps Stoplamps Transfer Case Courtesy Lamps Cargo Lamp Glove Box Lamp Dome Reading Lamps Vanity Mirrors Power Mirrors Fuse Circuit Breaker 4 O oo NAU 10 11 12 13 14 yellow blue Usage Instrument Cluster DRL Relay Lamp Switch Keyless Entry Low Coolant Module Illuminated Entry Module Rear Comfort Controls Cruise Control Auxiliary Power Outlet Crank License Lamp Parking Lamps Taillamps Tailgate Lamps Front Sidemarkers Fog Lamp Relay Door Switch Illumination Fender Lamps Headlamp Switch Illumination Air Bag System Wiper Motor Washer Pump A C A C Blower High Blower Relay Power Amp Rear Liftglass Cigarette Lighter Door Lock Relay Power Lumbar Seat 4WD Indicator Cluster Front and Rear Comfort Controls Instrument Switches Radio Illumination Chime Modu
134. ce for the primary radio to a remote source the RSA will play the same remote source The rear speakers will be muted when the RSA power is turned on You may operate the RSA functions even when the primary radio is off Note that this feature is intended for rear seat passengers The following function is controlled by the primary radio knob PWR VOL Push this knob twice to turn RSA off The following functions are controlled by the RSA system buttons PWR Press this button to turn RSA on or off VOL Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and counterclockwise to decrease volume Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it The upper VOL knob controls the upper headphone and the lower VOL knob controls the lower headphone AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 If the front passengers are already listening to AM FM the RSA controller will not switch between the bands and cannot change the frequency yellow blue SEEK While listening to AM FM press the up arrow to tune to the next higher station and stay there Press the down arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking The SEEK button is inactive if the AM FM mode on the front radio is in use While listening to a cassette tape press the up arrow to hear the next selection on the tape Press the down arrow to go back to the previous
135. d add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service ACTUAL Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service Continued 7 33 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Continued If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV valve An Emission Control Service 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use MILEAGE Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test the cool
136. d at the front of this control panel is for the power lumbar adjustment which is explained next yellowl Your vehicle has a power lumbar adjuster You can The control for the driver s side heated seat is located on increase or decrease lumbar support in an area of the the left side of the seat The control for the right front lower seatback passenger is located on the right side of the passenger seat Move the switch forward to MED or HIGH temperature to turn on the heating elements in the seat The right front passenger s safety belt must be buckled before the heating elements in that seat will operate To To decrease support press and hold the rear of the turn the heated seats off move the switch rearward to rocker switch Let go of the switch when the lower OFF For information on heated rear seats see Heated seatback reaches the desired level of support Rear Seats in the Index To increase support press and hold the front of the rocker switch Let go of the switch when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support yellow blue Reclining Front Seatbacks To adjust the seatback move the lever rearward Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it Move the lever again rearward and the seatback will go to an upright position But don t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving 1 4 Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you
137. d both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s can move suddenly You or others could be how to do it injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into that follow PARK P yet 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels If you have four wheel drive and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL N your vehicle will be free 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking in NEUTRAL N brake and then shift to PARK P 4 52 When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you Start your engine Shift into a gear and Release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you r
138. d the section use a sponge to remove the suds 6 Wipe cleaned area with a clean damp towel or cloth 7 Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry 6 48 yellow blue Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caused by such things as catsup coffee black egg fruit fruit juice milk soft drinks vomit urine and blood can be removed as follows 1 4 Carefully scrape off excess stain then sponge the soiled area with cool water If a stain remains follow the multi purpose interior cleaner instructions described earlier If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine treat the area with a water baking soda solution 1 teaspoon 5 ml of baking soda to 1 cup 250 ml of lukewarm water Let dry Stains caused by candy ice cream mayonnaise chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows 1 2 Carefully scrape off excess stain First clean with cool water and allow to dry completely If a stain remains follow instructions for Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner Fabric Protection Your vehicle has carpet that has been treated with Scotchgard Fabric Protector a 3M product It protects fabrics by repelling oil and water which are the carriers of most stains Even with this protection you still need to clean your carpet often to keep it looking new Further information on cleaning is available by calling 1 800 433 3296 in Minnesota 1 800 642 6167 Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a cle
139. de 2 19 Lockout Prevention sleeeleeeeeeese 2 17 9 4 yellow blue Theft Deterrent Arming Method 2 18 Theft Deterrent Arming Verification 2 19 Filling a Portable Fuel Container suse 6 8 Filling Your Tank 224 etam Rn 6 5 Filter Air Cleaner 0 000000 000 cus 6 15 6 64 Filter Engine Oil 00 000 c eee 6 14 6 64 Finish Care senate rae IER RERUM 6 51 Finish Damage acs red 3 Mastek ones ERR 6 53 First Gear Automatic Transmission 2 27 Flashers Hazard Warning esses 5 2 Flat Tire Changing 5e RI eme 5 19 Fluid Capacities ic seriis Re Re E eh 6 63 Fluid Leak Check aoreet e etm 6 33 Fluids and Lubricants 0 0 00000 7 41 Bog Lamps esse reed b RES 2 48 6 36 6 61 Folding the Rear Seat lise esses 1 6 Foreign Countries Fuel 0 00 00 000 0008 6 5 Four Wheel Drive 0 000000 cee eee 2 28 6 21 French Language Manual s esses ii Front Axle 1 5 Lou eode tae aides 6 22 1 42 Front Axle Locking Feature 0004 2 28 Front Park Turn Signal Bulb Replacement 6 36 6 61 Front Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement 6 36 6 61 Front Towing a rriok iate ERE ere ERR 5 8 PUG 2zieeb3ac e pte v anas t ATS ee GR RA M ones 6 3 Canada 2 suis paces bis atus eq iip pi e NN 6 3 Filling a Portable Container
140. de of your instrument panel When the main fuse block is open the RADIO fuse Fuse 17 is located in the lower right corner side of the fuse panel See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index 5 Tum the ignition to ACCESSORY You should hear two chimes to verify that the system is in programming mode You will also be able to set Keyless Entry Verification Arming Method Arming Verification Driver s Door Delay Shock Sensor Enable and Lockout Prevention Lockout Prevention Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 2 This means that your power door locks will not lock when the keys are in the ignition and a door is open To change the factory setting do the following 1 Press the LOCK switch on the door 2 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for 3 Press the LOCK switch on the door until you hear the number of chimes that correspond to the mode selection you want Mode 1 Both Off Doors will lock unlock when you press the power door lock switch Mode 2 Lockout Prevention Enabled yellow blue Keyless Entry Verification Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 5 This means that when you use the keyless entry transmitter to lock unlock your vehicle your headlamps and parking lamps will flash briefly upon the first press on LOCK Your horn will sound briefly and your headlamps and parking lamps will flash briefly upon the second
141. ditional information See footnote 69 000 Miles 115 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote 7 18 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 72 000 Miles 120 000 km Eug Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY mE F i SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first a See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals fo
142. e NOTE Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The starter should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the starter works in any other position your vehicle needs service around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface Firmly apply the parking brake see Parking Brake in the Index if necessary NOTE Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move With the engine off turn the key to the RUN position but don t start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P your vehicle s BTSI needs service 7 37 Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK P The key should come out only in LOCK Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission PARK P Mechanism Check When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move 7 38 yellow blue Park on a fairly steep hill
143. e Circuits Protected Horn Underhood Lamp Auxiliary Fan Injectors PCM VCM Heated Front Seats Air Conditioning Heated Outside Mirrors Ignition Switch EGR Canister Purge EVRV Idle Coast Solenoid Heated O5 Heated Rear Seats Headlamp and Panel Dimmer Switch Fog and Courtesy Fuses Battery Fuse Block Busbar Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Anti Lock Brake Module Hi Blower and Rear Blower Relays Stoplamps Heated Seats Replacement Bulbs LAMP OR BULB HEADLAMPS Low Beam High Beam LAMP OR BULB EXTERIOR Front Marker Lamp Front Parking and Turn Lamp Rear Parking Lamp Rear Stop and Turn Lamp Back up Lamp License Plate Lamp Underhood Lamp Fog Lamp TRADE NO 9006 HB4 9005 HB3 TRADE NO 194 2357NA 3057 3057 3156 194 93 894 POWER RATING AT 12 8V WATTS 55 65 QTY N N NNN AA RN QTY yellow blue Continued 6 61 Replacement Bulbs Continued LAMP OR BULB INTERIOR Dome Lamps Reading Lamps Roof Console Lamps Door Courtesy Lamp Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp Ashtray Lamp Sunshade Vanity Mirror 6 62 TRADE NO 211 2 211 2 168 194 194 194 74 QTY A N N A N yellow blue yellow blue Capacities and Specifications Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for more information Engine Identification Engine VORTEC 5700 Type V8 RPO Code L31 VIN Code R Fuel System SFI Sequential Fuel Injection Wheels
144. e Once the tape is playing use the VOL BAL FADE BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the display whenever a tape is being played Anytime a tape is inserted the top side is selected for play first The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or CrO and adjusts for best playback sound For metal tapes the double D symbol will appear on the display PREV 1 Press the PREV button or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation PROG 2 Press this button to switch from one side of the tape to the other NEXT 3 Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection A minimum three second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation The sound will mute while searching for the next selection REV 4 Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV again The radio will play the last selected station while reversing the tape The tape direction arrow will blink during the reverse operation XC 5 Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise The double D symbol will appear on the display w
145. e pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil axle lubricant belt cooling system and brake adjustment Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Trailer Wiring Harness 2 A SENSUS i S om a Light Duty Wiring Harness yellow blue 4 53 Additional Heavy Duty Wiring An eight wire harness is stored under the rear bumper of your vehicle The five wire light duty harness is located at the left hand rear inner lower quarter panel The additional heavy duty wiring is located forward of the rear bumper and is attached to the center of the rear crossmember or the forward vertical surface of the platform hitch This harness has a 30 amp battery feed wire and no connector and should be wired by a qualified electrical technician After choosing an aftermarket mating connector pair have the technician attach one connector to 4 54 yellow blue the eight wire trailer harness and the other connector to the wiring harness on the trailer Be sure that the wiring harness on the trailer is strapped to the trailer s frame and leave it loose enough so that the wiring doesn t
146. e vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you re driving brake normally but don t pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push yellow blue Anti Lock Brakes ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on This is normal E ANTI LOCK If there s a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index Here s how anti lock works Let s say the road is wet You
147. e 6 23 7 41 Rundown Protection 6 0 e essen eee 2 50 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light Gh dank 2 75 4 7 Warnings DEDEDE ee A eee ees 5 3 5 5 Anti Lock Brakes 0000 c ccc eee e e 4 7 BBB Auto Line X euet Sip ah rk estere done 8 4 Anti Theft Radio sse esee 3 19 Better Business Bureau Mediation 8 4 Appearance Care PROSPECT 6 47 Blizzard n 4 40 Appearance Care and Materials 00005 6 54 Brake Arbitration Program llse ee 8 9 Adjustment ssssseeee n ee 6 32 Ashtray So ideceteexit bx ehe e Re CR RR DER ORIS 2 61 Fluid eee eee eee eee teers 6 29 7 40 Audio Equipment Adding BUMPER Bins 3 22 Master Cylinder MH 6 29 Audio Systems sirere e Lose pes bade EEA EE pee eased 3 7 Parking eese 2 32 Pedal Travel i essence ok ok ec dee bc cen 6 32 Brake Continued Replacing System Parts 0 000 6 32 System Warning Light 005 2 74 Trailers 263 deer eee eos mc ree eet RE tures 4 49 Transmission Shift Interlock Check 7 37 Wear das shoe osse edese exces ed die dictae n eben bu 6 31 Brakes Anti Lock eeeeeeeee 4 7 Braking sie dsccaseataaach ee eN e EEE pate UE GE 4 6 Braking in Emergencies 0 000 000 ee eee 4 9 Break In New Vehicle 00 000 nunnana 2 20 Brightness Control 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 2 49 BIST Check amp 2 tae habit en eee cut ie Wad e
148. e and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this 2 74 yellow blue condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone If you must drive turn off all unnecessary accessories Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible Brake System Warning Light When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn t release fully If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake problem Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there could be a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem DP BRAKE If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop c
149. e garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts 6 52 yellow blue Cleaning Aluminum Wheels Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Don t use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on any wheels other than chrome plated wheels Don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels Cleaning Tires To clean your tires use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner NOTICE When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle Petroleum based
150. e hooks at a sideways angle The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back NOTICE Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty yellow blue f NOTES 5 35 yellow blue NOTES 5 36 yellow blue Section 6 Service and Appearance Care C LLL LLLI O Ol LLL 811 1 1 1 11 1111 l l Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle This section begins with service and fuel information and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels There is also technical information about your vehicle and a part devoted to its appearance care 6 2 Service 6 29 Brakes 6 3 Fuel 6 33 Battery 6 5 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6 34 Bulb Replacement 6 5 Filling Your Tank 6 38 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 6 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6 39 Tires 6 8 Checking Things Under the Hood 6 47 Appearance Care 6 11 Engine Oil 6 47 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 6 15 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 50 Care of the Safety Belts 6 17 Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 51 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle 6 20 Rear Axle 6 54 GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 6 21 Four Wheel Drive 6 55 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 22 Radiator Pressure Cap 6 56 Electrical System 6 23 Thermostat 6 61 Replacement Bulbs 6 23 Engine Coolant 6 63 Capacities and Specifications 6 27 Power St
151. e of the center of the grill Lift the hood Before closing the hood be sure all filler caps are on properly Pull down the hood and close it firmly yellow When you lift up the hood you ll see A Battery F Engine Oil Dipstick J Power Steering Fluid Reservoir B Coolant Recovery Tank G Automatic Transmission K Brake Fluid Reservoir C Radiator Cap Dipstick L Windshield Washer D Air Cleaner H Fan Fluid Reservoir E Air Filter Restriction Indicator I Engine Oil Fill M Fuse Relay Center Engine Oil It s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick has a yellow ring handle and is located on the passenger s side of the engine Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you don t the oil dipstick might not show the actual level yellow blue Checking Engine Oil Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD mark then you ll need to add at least one quart of oil But you must use the right kind This part explains what kind of oil to use For crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications in the Index 6 11 NOTICE Don t add too much oil
152. e seat cushion until it latches in position After returning the seat to the passenger position return the head restraints to the top of the seatback Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat cushion to make sure that the seat is securely in place If the latch plate portion of the center safety belt was put in the center armrest when the seat was folded take the latch plate portion out and place it on the seat That way the center position safety belt will be available for the center rear seat passenger to use Heated Rear Seats The controls for the heated rear seats are located on the rear of the center floor console below the rear seat audio controls yellow blue Press the top of the switch to HI or the bottom of the switch to LO to turn on the heating elements in the outside rear seat positions The text HI or LO on the switch will illuminate to indicate that the heated seat elements are operating The switch on the left side operates the left seat and the switch on the right side operates the right seat The rear seat outside passenger s safety belt must be attached before the heating element in that seat will operate To turn the heated seats off move the switch to the center For more information on heated front seats see Heated Front Seats in the Index Safety Belts They re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do
153. e theft deterrent indicator on the center floor console will not flash If you arm the system using either the power door lock switch or by passive arming only the headlamps and parking lamps will flash for verification To change the factory setting do the following 1 Press the LOCK switch on the keyless entry transmitter 2 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for 3 Press the LOCK switch on the keyless entry transmitter until you hear the number of chimes that corresponds to the mode selection you want Mode 1 All Off No horn chirps or headlamps and parking lamps will flash yellow blue Mode 2 Horn and Lamps Your headlamps and parking lamps will flash and your horn will chirp twice to verify the system is armed using any arming method Headlamps and parking lamps only will flash when disarming Mode 3 Horn and Lamps Lamps If you use the keyless entry transmitter to arm the system your headlamps and parking lamps will flash and your horn will chirp twice to verify that the system is armed If you use either the power door lock switch or passive arming only your headlamps and parking lamps will flash for verification The headlamps and parking lamps will flash only when disarming Mode 4 Lamps When your vehicle arms only your headlamps and parking lamps will flash for verification The headlamps and parking lamps will flash only when disarming
154. e tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends 6 44 yellow blue upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temper
155. ease call us at 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 or write Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 436008 Pontiac MI 48343 6008 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 yellow blue Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada Service manuals owner s manuals and other service literature are available for purchase for all current and past model General Motors vehicles The toll free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1 800 668 5539 8 11 yellow blue 1999 GMC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check money order or credit card information to Helm Incorporated address below CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1999 GMC SERVICE MANUALS Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc RETAIL SELL PRICE 90 00 TRANSMISSION TRANSAXLE TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for the 1999 GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases RETAIL S
156. eating or cooling system to its highest speed with the setting on VENT That will force outside air into your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust in the Index yellow blue Tailgate Glass and Tailgate If your vehicle has a tailgate you must raise the rear glass before lowering the tailgate To open the glass from the outside use your key With the key in the lock turn the key clockwise to release the glass then lift it up To release the glass from the inside use the electric tailgate glass release switch on the instrument panel For more information see Tailgate Electric Glass Release in the Index To open the tailgate lift up on the handle while pulling the tailgate toward you Close the tailgate before closing the rear glass After closing the tailgate make sure the tailgate is securely latched by pulling it toward you After closing the rear glass pull up on its handle to make sure it is locked 2 11 Panel Doors To open the rear panel doors you must open the passenger s side panel door first If the door is locked insert your door key in the lock and turn it counterclockwise to unlock it To open the passenger s side panel door pull up on the handle and pull the door open To open the driver s side panel door first open the passenger s side panel door Then pull the handle on the
157. ebris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for See Driving Through Water in the Index for more at additional information information on driving through water 4 27 Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue 4 28 yellow blue Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively Don t drink and drive Since you can t see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead In remote areas watch for animals If you re tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest Night Vision No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year o
158. ed the system will arm immediately If the ignition was just turned off and a door was opened the system will arm six seconds after the doors tailgate or panel doors are closed whether or not you lock them with the manual door lock If a door is opened without the ignition being turned on the system will wait 30 seconds after the doors tailgate or panel doors are closed before arming allowing you time to get into the vehicle and put the key in the ignition The parking lamps will flash when the system arms Passive arming is not enabled from the factory Disarming the System There are two ways to disarm the system 1 Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter If the horn chirps two or three times when you unlock the vehicle the alarm sounded in your absence Two chirps means that the shock sensor was set off and three chirps means that a door tailgate or the panel doors were opened 2 Turn the ignition to RUN with the proper key For more information on customizing the features mentioned here see Feature Customization in the Index 2 15 Turning Off the Alarm If you started the alarm by pressing the panic button on the keyless entry transmitter you must either push that button again or turn the ignition to RUN to stop the alarm If the alarm is sounding due to the shock sensor or a door tailgate or panel door opening it can be turned off by either turning the ignition switch with a proper key ins
159. ed the trip odometer may not go all the way back to zero If it doesn t you may have to press the reset button again to reset the readout to zero Tachometer Your tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm NOTICE If you operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area your engine or other parts could be damaged Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by operating the engine in the red area isn t covered by your vehicle warranty Don t operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area 2 71 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with you
160. eded The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly yellow blue The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won t work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes 6 31 Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications Your rear drum brakes don t have wear indicators but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise have the rear brake linings inspected immediately Also the rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing When you have the front brake pads replaced have the rear brakes inspected too Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets See Brake System Inspection in Section 7 of this manual under Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase i
161. ee pP n exu e eae 1 23 Automatic Headlamp System 00 2 47 Adding Equipment 000000 1 30 Automatic Transmission How Does it Restrain llle 1 27 CHECK uu reete meotie utes ce re gie tese 7 36 How it Works eperra E E EE eee 1 25 PI xin ROSAS e Rea V qe eom 6 17 7 41 Location s cons dee yu x HESD EE Ra Ie RE 1 25 Operation 1uce sees tedoex wo hg ree dette ne 2 25 Readiness Light 000 00 1 25 2 73 Ou Rm 2 27 Servicing p shan be ii oa Ra im cae Rh Aceh UR eee 1 29 Park Mechanism Check 0 000 7 38 What Makes it Inflate 00 004 1 27 SHUN 2 episco Eoo m we ede OE 2 25 What Will You See After it Inflates 1 28 Auxiliary Power Outlet 0000 2 62 When Should it Inflate 0008 1 27 Axle 5 10 Uae cos cd E Ae RR E eter 6 22 1 42 Air Cleaner Filter 0 200000000000 c cece ee 6 15 6 64 Axle Locking Rear 000 brier eee eee 2 38 Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check 7 36 Axle Redi ee pns gabe dics Puce 6 20 7 42 Air Conditioning ssssesssse 3 2 3 3 3 4 Air Conditioning Refrigerants 0 6 64 Alignment and Balance Tire 00 00e 0 00 6 45 Battery ee 6 33 Aluminum Wheels Cleaning 0 000005 6 52 Jump Starting 5 3 Antenna Fixed esses ee 3 24 Replacement Keyless Entry lesse 2 9 Antifreeze 0 ce n
162. eering Fluid 6 64 Air Conditioning Refrigerants 6 28 Windshield Washer Fluid 6 65 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you ll go to your dealer for all your service needs You ll get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco Genuine Parts Eq Goodwrench yellow blue Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work you ll want to use the proper GM Service Manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record in the Index You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it Besure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and me
163. ellow blue Q Am Iikely to stall when going downhill A It s much more likely to happen going uphill But if it happens going downhill here s what to do Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes Apply the parking brake Shift to PARK P and while still braking restart the engine Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down If the engine won t start get out and get help 4 23 Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later an off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill If this happens you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline Here are some things to consider Ahillthat can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when you drive across an incline the much more narrow track width the distance between the left and right wheels may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Also driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will
164. els and tires during towing yellow blue Loading Your Vehicle GAWR FRT RIM COLD TIRE PRESSURE E C The Certification Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver s door The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo 4 43 The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way 4 44 yell
165. emporary vehicle license tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window yellow blue NOTICE Don t use a razor blade or anything else sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Audio Systems Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first Find out what your Delco Electronics system can do and how to operate all its controls to be sure you re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it Setting the Clock Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears on the display To display the clock with the ignition off press RECALL or HR MN and the time will be displayed for a few seconds There is an initial two second delay before the clock goes into the time set mode AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Tn Ll sh Included with the AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player are six Bose high performance speakers an Acoustimass bass module and a seven channel Bose amplifier Please see your dealer for details Playing the Radio PWR VOL Press this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume The
166. engine longer Should the fluid level be low during a cold check you must perform a hot check before adding fluid This will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level Checking the Fluid Level Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more yellow blue Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps 3 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the COLD area for a cold check or in the HOT area or cross hatched area for a hot check 4 Ifthe fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 1 The red transmission dipstick is located at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger s side Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 6 19 How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Add fluid only
167. ent door Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out 2 55 Rear Compartment The rear compartment can be used to store a small item like a book To open the rear compartment press the release button located at the rear of the compartment door Instrument Panel Cupholder Your vehicle has a cupholder in the middle of the instrument panel To use the cupholder pull the handle and slide the cupholder tray open To close the cupholder slide it back into the instrument panel 2 56 yellow blue Center Floor Console Your vehicle has a console compartment between the bucket seats To open it insert the console key into the lock and unlock the console Press the button in and swing the console lid upward The console key is for use on the storage compartment only The console has a small storage bin covered by a lid When open the lid provides a writing surface The dealer installed OnStar cellular telephone option replaces the writing surface The console has two cupholders and two storage trays for the front passenger and driver to use Your console also has a cupholder that swings down for the rear seat passengers to use The console also contains the following components Rear Seat Audio System Controls Rear Heated Seat Switches Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlet Six Disc CD Changer Subwoofer Audio Amplifier yellow blue Shock Sensor Adjuster
168. eplacement parts yellow blue Service Parts Identification Label You ll find this label on the inside of the glove box It s very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label is your VIN the model designation paint information and a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle 6 55 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment NOTICE Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index Headlamps The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in the lamp switch An electrical overload will cause the lamps to flicker on and off or in some cases to remain off If this happens have your headlamp wiring checked right away 6 56 yellow blue Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload overload due to heavy snow etc may cause wiper linkage damage
169. er blows to the vehicle Its sensitivity can be adjusted if more or less sensitivity is desired If sensitivity is increased too much it may give false alarms caused by gusts of wind or other natural events that may shake the vehicle The adjustment for the shock sensor sensitivity can be accessed through a hole in the forward wall of the main bin of the center floor console Using a small flat tipped screwdriver turn the adjuster clockwise to increase sensitivity and turn counterclockwise 2 14 yellow blue to decrease sensitivity The shock sensor is ignored by the alarm system when the ignition is on when the tailgate or panel doors are open when the alarm is disarmed when customized to be ignored and for five seconds after the horn sounds an alarm or chirp The shock sensor is ignored after triggering three full alarms until the system is rearmed Arming the System The alarm system can be armed to detect break ins by locking your vehicle using the keyless entry or by locking the doors with the power door lock switch Passive arming is also available if you would like the system to arm all by itself after the doors have been closed for a short time See Feature Customization in the Index When the system is armed a red light will flash on the center floor console briefly once every two seconds If you return to your vehicle and the red light is flashing two brief flashes every two seconds the system is armed and
170. er needs to be important to do it properly Added sound cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as equipment may interfere with the operation of soon as possible 1O preven damage to your tapes and player If you notice a reduction in sound quality try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault If this other cassette has no improvement Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly your vehicle s engine Delco Electronics radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the in sound quality clean the tape player operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action So before adding sound equipment check with non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn covering mobile radio and telephone units The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership GM Part No 12344789 3 22 When using a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette it is normal for the cassette to eject because your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected use the following steps 1 Turn the
171. er the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle When an air bag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door 1 28 yellow blue In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag Airbags are designed to inflate only once After they inflate you ll need some new parts for your air bag system If you don t get them the air bag system won t be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information about the air bag system The module records information about the readiness of the system when the sensors are activated and driver s safety belt usage at deployment Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system Improper service can mean that your air bag system won t work properly See your dealer for service NOTICE
172. ere we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you ll be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area Automatic Transmission Operation as PRANOS2 1 There are several different positions for your shift lever Your vehicle features an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument cluster This display must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of PARK P This means that if your key is in OFF rather than LOCK there will be a small current drain on your battery which could discharge your battery over a period of time If you need to leave your key in the ignition in OFF for an extended period for any reason it is recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to prevent discharging your battery l60 yellow blue PARK P This locks your rear wheels It s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can t move easily It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See
173. erted or by pressing any button on the keyless entry transmitter If you use your keyless entry transmitter to silence the alarm additional things will happen depending upon which button you press Pressing the UNLOCK button will turn the alarm off unlock the driver s door and disarm the system Pressing the LOCK button will turn the alarm off keep the doors locked and keep the system armed Pressing the REAR 2X button will turn the alarm off and disarm the system Pressing the panic button will turn the alarm off keep the doors locked and keep the system armed If the alarm is sounding because an incorrect ignition key was used press any button on the keyless entry transmitter to turn the alarm off The alarm will stop by itself after two minutes 2 16 yellow blue Feature Customization Your vehicle s locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features The following list tells you the features that can be programmed Lockout Prevention Keyless Entry Verification Theft Deterrent Arming Method Theft Deterrent Arming Verification Driver s Door Alarm Delay To program features your vehicle must be in the programming mode Follow these steps 1 Put your key in the ignition 2 Turn the ignition to RUN to disarm the theft deterrent system 3 Turn the ignition to OFF 4 Remove the RADIO fuse Fuse 17 This fuse is in the main fuse block located on the left si
174. es 45 ml of a liquor like whiskey gin or vodka It s the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men 4 4 yellow blue Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks The law in many U S states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0 10 percent In a growing number of U S states and throughout Canada the limit is 0 08 percent In some other countries it s even lower The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we ve seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisio
175. et brakes can cause accidents They won t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally 4 31 Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you re going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning doesn t happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just isn t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining yellow blue Driving Through Deep Standing Water NOTICE If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you can t avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly Some Other Rainy Weather Ti
176. eue E CE rni CUE ECHTE eU 6 10 Air Cleaner Filter 0 00 00 0000000 6 15 6 64 Coolants 2e Le Ree T bU d 6 23 7 41 Coolant Heater iis cive RR ERE 2 24 Coolant Level Check seleeeeeesssse 7 35 Coolant Temperature Gage 0 2 76 Cooling System 0 ccc eee eee eee 6 64 EXHAUST x5 oss een eate ted cates edo rema 2 36 4 41 Identification 2 6 0 0 2 eee eee eee 6 55 Oil Level Check iis eere renee eiert Poue EE 7 35 Overheating cer pire roitda eae PER a HE dn 5 9 Running While Parked 004 2 37 Specifications 0 0 cee e eee 6 63 Starting YOUE i2 ocu eve icles m ea a E Cee 2 22 Engine Oll 5 Leelia em RE 6 11 6 65 7 41 Adding 26esseck riire ei Karee Eur E ER Ye 6 11 Additives sesidir Mah ene E UR HAE DES 6 13 Checking 5445s ved esca ees e bem 6 11 Pressure Gape cesset erp nct pct e ec ates 2 79 Used eie mem mem ees mee des 6 14 When to Change 0 0 0 6 14 Equipment Adding to the Outside of Your Vehicle 6 3 Ethanol o cessi tis oer eb Rees Y ve RO Na ex epe dies 6 4 Exhaust Engine lslsleseee esses 2 36 4 41 Exit Lighting and Delayed Illumination 2 49 Exterior Lamps sis eres vm ek eed 2 46 Fabric Cleatng 32 x e aep eh eee ettet eae 6 47 Feature Customization seeeeeeeeeee ee 2 16 Driver s Door Alarm Delay 0 2 19 Keyless Entry Verification 000005 2 17 Leaving Programming Mo
177. ex For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an air bag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the air bag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The air bag system does not need regular maintenance 1 29 Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Q A iS If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the front of my vehicle will it keep the air bags from working properly As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle s basic structure isn t changed it s not likely to keep the air bags from working properly in a crash Is there anything I might add to the front of the vehicle that could keep the air bags from working properly Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system front end sheet metal or height they may keep the air bag system from working properly Also the air bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and 1 30 yellow blue addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfact
178. f torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P yellow blue Shifting Out of PARK P Your vehicle has a brake transmission shift interlock system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transmission in the Index If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you want If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of PARK P try this 1 Turn the key to the OFF ignition position Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL N Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want S E a 5 Have the brake transmission shift interlock system fixed as soon as you can 2 35 yellow blue Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you can t see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when
179. f you haven t found a problem yet but the coolant level isn t at or above the COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid like alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant NOTICE In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture blue N CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine 5 13 yellow blue When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or above the COLD mark start your vehicle If the overheat warning continues there s one more thing you can try You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it Steam and s
180. g you Insert the other end through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground Continue to turn the ratchet until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle When the tire has been lowered tilt the retainer at the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through the wheel opening Put the spare tire near the flat tire 5 21 yellow blue The tools you ll be using include the jack A the jack handle extension B the jack handle C the wheel wrench D and the ratchet E The jack handle extension is used if the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle 5 22 Attach the jack handle and jack handle extension if needed to the jack yellow blue UP Marking DOWN Marking With the UP marking on the ratchet facing you rotate side has a DOWN marking the ratchet clockwise That will lift the jack head a little One side of the ratchet has an UP marking The other 5 23 yellow To access the lug nuts place the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry off the center piece to remove it 1 Use the ratchet and wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise with DOWN facing you to loosen the wheel nuts Don t remove the wheel nuts yet 2 If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle put the jack handle extension on the jack handle
181. go Tie the load to the crossrails and tie loops Also tie the load to the bumpers Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or side rails are damaged For the purpose of wind noise reduction locate the front crossrail approximately 18 to 24 inches 46 cm to 58 cm rearward of the front supports After moving the crossrails be sure to tighten all the slider screws Your vehicle has a Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL located above the tailgate glass or above the rear load doors If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle care should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Front Ashtray The front ashtray is located at the bottom of the instrument panel Pull on the notch in the ashtray door to open it NOTICE If you store paper or other things that burn in your ashtrays they could be set on fire by cigarettes or other smoking materials That could cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle Do not store papers and other things that burn in your ashtrays To remove the front ashtray press the retainer spring and pivot the ashtray toward you To replace the ashtray place the bottom part of the ashtray on the pivot bar at the bottom of its mounting on the instrument panel Then rotate the ashtray back to its original position yellow blue Rear Door Ashtrays To use a rear ashtray flip the lid open To remove a rear ashtray open the lid and pu
182. h a clean rag Replace the cap and completely tighten it Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the FULL COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals 6 27 yellow blue Windshield Washer Fluid NOTICE What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read When using concentrated washer fluid the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be follow the manufacturer s instructions for operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature adding water may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient Don t mix water with ready to use washer protection against freezing fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze Adding Washer Fluid and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it s very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Don t use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY Add washer fluid unti
183. h a rear seat is a safer place you can secure a Front Seat Position forward facing child restraint in the right front seat You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part D i about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air 4 bag always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward facing child restraint See Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag Never Seats in the Index put a rear facing child restraint in this seat Here s why 5 Pitihetestrint onthe s i 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions A child in a rear facing child restraint can be will show you how seriously injured or killed if the right front ae f If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or passenger s air bag inflates even though your neck put it behind the child restraint vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat 1 52 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is 5 P
184. h your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe Turnon your hazard flashers You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 40 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You can t see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn t collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that s away from the wind This will help keep CO out yellow blue Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you
185. hade cte aeeai ee to e nece doe 2 58 SEVICE ME aE a e ap a e e aleas 6 2 Bulletins Ordering 000 8 12 8 13 Engine Soon Light 00 00 0000 2 76 Manuals Ordering 2 0 000 ee 8 12 8 13 Parts Identification Label 0004 6 55 Publications Ordering lusus 8 12 8 13 Work Doing Your Own 00 00 0008 6 2 Service and Appearance Care 0000 6 1 Service and Owner Publications 8 12 8 13 Service Four Wheel Drive Warning Light 2 80 Service Publications 000 ce ae 8 12 8 13 Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle 1 29 Sheet Metal Damage 00 00005 6 53 Shift beyet PEE 2 25 Shifting Automatic Transmission 002005 2 25 Into Park P 20 ee eee eee 2 33 Out of Path P 4 dt acedio can ee dea cba otra eee 2 35 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 1 16 1 32 Signaling Turns 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 2 40 Skiddihg 33 2 2 Guid Mo cieae statue ahead e RR RP ee 4 13 Sound Equipment Adding 0000 3 22 Specifications and Capacities 000 6 63 Specifications Engine 0 0 eee eee 6 63 Speech Impaired Customer Assistance 8 4 Speedometer o s erein i ews hs beds EN Nal eee oe 2 71 Speed Sensitive Steering llle eese 4 9 Stains Cleaning 4 645496 ee Re ttie onae EE
186. he display Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down Press MN and 000 will appear on the display Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code Press AM FM and this time the display will show SEC to let you know that your radio is secure The LED indicator by the volume control will begin flashing when the ignition is turned off 3 20 yellow blue Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Turn the ignition on LOC will appear on the display 2 Press MN and 000 will appear on the display 3 Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 4 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 5 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show SEC indicating the radio is now operable and secure If you enter the wrong code eight times INOP will appear on the display You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again When you try again you will only have t
187. he places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident yellow blue Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel Tighten each wheel nut by hand with the wheel wrench until the wheel is held against the hub 5 27 yellow blue Front Position Rear Position 9 Tighten each wheel nut by turning the wheel wrench clockwise 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the ratchet and wheel wrench counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 5 28 10 Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown Turn the wheel wrench clockwise yellow blue Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 140 Ib ft 190 N m NOTICE Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence a
188. he result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years over 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it s against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws yellow blue The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if the driver plans to drive It s a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 1b 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounc
189. hile the player is in this mode Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation FWD 6 Press this button to rapidly forward the tape to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again The radio will play the last selected station while forwarding the tape The tape direction arrow will blink during the forward operation AM FM Press this button to switch from a tape to the radio yellow blue TAPE AUX Press this button if you have a tape loaded in the cassette tape player and the radio is turned on to play a tape Press AM FM to return to the radio when a tape is playing Press TAPE AUX to switch between the tape player and console mounted CD changer if both are loaded When a tape is playing a lighted arrow will appear on the display and show the direction of play If the radio is turned off the tape stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped EJECT Press this button to remove the tape The radio will now play EJECT can be used with either the ignition or radio off To load a cassette tape with the ignition or radio off press EJECT before loading the cassette CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the
190. hip Service Department 6 17 If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C Athigh speed for quite a while In heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C 6 18 yellow blue Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it s colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in THIRD 3 until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes Then follow the hot check procedures Checking Transmission Fluid Cold A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off and is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it s colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the
191. his section It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly yellow blue Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you re driving OFF ROAD RECOVERY LEFT APPROX QUARTER TURN edge of paved surface If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway 4 Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehic
192. hree chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears If you lose or forget your code contact your dealer Disabling the Theft Deterrent Feature Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps 1 Tum the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press the 1 and 4 buttons together Hold them down until SEC shows on the display 4 Press MN and 000 will appear on the display 5 Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 6 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 7 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show indicating that the radio is no longer secured If the code entered is incorrect SEC will appear on the display The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio the radio won t turn on and LOC will appear on the display yellow blue To unlock a secured radio see Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss earlier in this section Understanding Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range however can cause stations to interfere with each other AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever
193. ht will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as Light Flashing A misfire condition has been good and your engine may not run as smoothly detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and This could lead to costly repairs that may not be may damage the emission control system on your _ covered by your warranty vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required e Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle NOTICE Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required Modifications made to the engine transmission If the Light Is Flashing exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls Reducing vehicle speed and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle Avoiding hard accelerations
194. icle When using the air conditioner turn off recirculation after the vehicle reaches a comfortable interior temperature When the right knob on the control panel is between HEATER and DEFROST the recirculation feature will not function The A C button between the temperature and mode knobs allows the air coming into your vehicle to be cooled This setting is useful for normal cooling on hot days When you use A C with the recirculation button pushed in turn off recirculation as soon as the vehicle reaches a comfortable interior temperature With the A C on turn the temperature knob to MAX for maximum cooling This setting also puts the system in the recirculation mode and helps to maximize your air conditioner s performance and your vehicle s fuel economy This setting also cools the air the fastest After the vehicle s interior reaches a comfortable temperature turn the temperature knob clockwise to place the air conditioning system in the normal mode Heating The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it On cold days use the HEATER or VENT HEAT setting with the temperature knob in the red area If you use the engine coolant heater before starting your engine in cold weather 20 F 8 C or lower your heating system will produce warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in cold weather The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces the time it takes for the engine to reach normal oper
195. ildren can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck A Move the child toward the center of the vehicle but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides in the Index If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt if your vehicle has one 1 55 1 56 yellow blue Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten
196. iler and are parking on any hill see Towing a Trailer in the Index That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving yellow blue Shifting Into PARK P 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P position like this It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow With four wheel drive if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL N your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL N If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Pull the shift lever toward you 2 33 yellow blue Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set With four wheel drive if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL N your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in M NEUTRAL N And if y
197. ill cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed Oil Pressure Gage The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problem causing low oil pressure Check your oil as soon as possible pressure in kPa Kilopascals yellow blue Don t keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as
198. ine up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck Thermostat Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature When you replace your thermostat an ACDelco thermostat is recommended yellow blue Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating in the Index 6 23 A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C Protect against rust and corrosion Help keep the proper engine temperature Let the warning gages work as they should NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first
199. ing system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service SERVICED BY 7 34 Part B Owner Checks and Services Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Part D At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil in the Index for further details Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant in the Index for further details yellow blue Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index for further details At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures See Tires in the Index for further details Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play See Audio Systems in the
200. intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes T The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Lubricate the front suspension kingpin bushings steering linkage transmission shift linkage transfer case shift linkage parking brake cable guides front axle propshaft spline and brake pedal springs Ball joints and kingpin bushings should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10 F 12 C or higher or they could be damaged A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule Drive axle service see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for proper lubricant to use Locking Differential Drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change At subsequent oil changes check fluid level and add fluid as needed 7 25 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled M
201. ion Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure in the Index Rear Seat Passengers It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions yellow When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder belts Here s how to wear one properly If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure 3 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part UN RBAC ES Ss K v 9 4 N yy K b N 1 AE Ns LH A a
202. ipment or car carrier equipment The transfer case must be placed in NEUTRAL N The towing limits for wheel lift equipment are Front Towing 55 mph 88 km h or legal speed limit and distance is unlimited Rear Towing 35 mph 55 km h for 50 miles 80 km Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance in the Index Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage in the Index If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine yellow blue Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool NOTICE If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Someti
203. ission Conil Service Replace spark plugs Oooo o oo y O An Emission Control Service Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service Continued 7 23 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Continued If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV valve An Emission Control Service 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use MILEAGE Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service SERVICED BY 7 24 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be performed after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same
204. ive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them If you go to your dealer for your service needs you ll know that GM trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts yellow blue The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle These schedules are for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on your vehicle s Certification Tire label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving With Your Four Wheel Drive Vehicle in the Index use the recommended fuel See Fuel in the Index Selecting the Right Schedule First you ll need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle Here s how to decide which schedule to follow Scheduled Maintenance Short Trip City Definition Follow the Short Trip City Maintenance Schedule if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles 8 to 16 km This is particularly impor
205. iving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only 4 26 yellow blue Driving in Water Light rain causes no special off road driving problems But heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe don t try it you probably won t get through Also water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts If the water isn t too deep then drive through it slowly At fast speeds water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water And as long as your tailpipe is under water you ll never be able to start your engine When you go through water remember that when your brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it s only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Don t drive through rushing water yellow blue After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or d
206. k In NOTICE Your vehicle doesn t need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t make full throttle starts Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings aren t yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Don t tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer in the Index for more information yellow blue Ignition Positions Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be injured or even killed They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in the vehicle with children Use your key to start your vehicle The key lets you turn the ignition switch to five different positions ACCESSORY A This position lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off Push in the key and turn it toward you Your steering wheel will remain locked just as it was before you inserted the key 2 21 LOCK B This position locks your ignition steering wheel and transmissio
207. knob is capable of being rotated continuously REAR DSPL When the primary radio is turned on press this button to turn the rear seat audio display on the primary radio on Press it again to turn the rear seat audio display off 3 8 yellow blue RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button When the radio is playing press this button to recall the station frequency SCV Your system has a feature called Speed Compensated Volume SCV With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any particular speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV turn the control all the way down Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display will show your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking
208. l also unlock All doors will lock when LOCK is pressed The tailgate or panel doors will unlock when the REAR 2X button is pressed twice within five seconds as long as the ignition is turned to OFF If the ignition is on the REAR 2X button will only work if the transmission is in PARK P The system will turn on the interior lamps for about 40 seconds or until the ignition is turned to RUN when you unlock the doors tailgate or panel doors The interior lamps will go off when you lock the doors Operating the keyless entry transmitter may interact with the theft deterrent system See Theft Deterrent System in the Index Alarm Panic Mode The theft deterrent system provides a fourth button on your transmitter This button is the alarm panic button If you are involved in a panic situation press this button and your vehicle s horn will sound and the headlamps will flash This will draw needed attention to you and your vehicle To turn this feature off either push the panic button again or turn the ignition to RUN This feature will not work if your ignition is on or if the transmitter is 30 feet 9 m or more away from your vehicle Transmitter Verification This feature provides feedback to the holder of the keyless entry transmitter that a command has been received by the keyless entry receiver The headlamps and parking lamps will flash on every lock and unlock command and the horn will sound only if the LOCK button i
209. l cycle every nine seconds yellow blue To wash the window push in on the switch Window This can really help on long trips Cruise control does washer fluid will continue to spray until the switch is not work at speeds below 25 mph 40 km h released The wiper will continue with three more wipes and then return to the setting that was chosen before the lever was pushed When you apply your brakes cruise control shuts off The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the front windshield washer If the fluid level is low in the washer fluid bottle you may not be able to wash your rear window If you can wash your windshield but not your rear window check the fluid level Cruise control can be dangerous where you can t drive safely at a steady speed So don t use your cruise control on winding Cruise Control roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Don t use cruise control on slippery roads With cruise control you can um maintain a speed of about GAUGE E 25 mph 40 km h or more OFF OM WIA Dl without keeping your foot PII on the accelerator 2 43 Setting Cruise Control If you leave your cruise control switch on when you re not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don t want to You could be startled and even lose contr
210. l information See footnote 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 28 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km 52 500 Miles 87 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control ined a l Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever
211. l rate a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers may not see your turn signal If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows don t go on at all when you signal a turn check for burned out bulbs and a blown fuse see Fuses in the Index Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high to low pull the turn signal lever all the way toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this light on the instrument panel also will be on Windshield Wipers You operate the windshield wipers by turning the control with the wiper symbol on it For a single wiping cycle turn the control to MIST Hold it there until the wipers start then let go The yellow blue wipers will stop after one cycle If you want more cycles hold the control on MIST longer You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes This can be very useful in light rain or snow Turn the control to choose the delay time The closer to LOW the shorter the delay For steady wiping at low speed turn the control to the LOW position For high speed wiping turn the control further to HIGH To stop the wipers turn the control to OFF Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely To avoid damage be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they are frozen to the windshield carefully loosen o
212. l the tank is full 6 28 Brakes Brake Fluid mw Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here It is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won t work well or won t work at all yellow blue So it isn t a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid won t correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index 6 29 Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap Just look at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level
213. ld driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you re driving don t wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who doesn t lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps yellow blue Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness
214. le Fuse Circuit Breaker 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Usage DRL Relay Fog Lamp Relay Front and Rear Turn Signals Back Up Lamps BTSI Solenoid Radio Ignition 4WAL VCM ABS Cruise Control Radio Battery PRNDL Automatic Transmission Speedometer Check Gages Warning Lights Security Steering Auxiliary Power Headlamp Delay Rear Wiper Rear Washer Pump Front Axle 4WD Indicator Lamp TP2 Relay Power Door Lock Six Way Power Seat Keyless Entry Module Power Windows yellow blue Underhood Fuse Relay Center The underhood fuse relay center is located in the rear of the engine compartment near the brake fluid reservoir Move the retainer clips for the cover to access the fuse block You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor The fuse extractor is mounted to the interior fuse block To remove fuses if you don t have a fuse extractor hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out 6 59 STARTER RELAY AIC RELAY Name ECM B RR DEFOG IGN E FUEL SOL GLOW PLUG 6 60 LIGHTING BATT BLOWER STOP HAZ HEATED SEATS B E Circuits Protected Fuel Pump PCM VCM Rear Window Defogger Auxiliary Fan Relay Coil A C Compressor Relay Hot Fuel Module Not Used Not Used Name HORN AUX FAN ECM 1 HTD ST FR A C HTD MIR ENG 1 HTD ST RR LIGHTING BATT IGN A IGN B ABS BLOWER STOP HAZ HEATED SEATS yellow blu
215. le ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it s all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic 4 12 yellow blue Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you re awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you re following a larger vehicle Also you won t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance t
216. le and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this part and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle Every vehicle is ready for some trailer towing If yours was built with trailering options as many are it s ready for heavier trailers But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer 4 45 If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh less than the capacity stamped on your step bumper You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than the capacity stamped on your step bumper You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Don t t
217. ll the ashtray assembly upward To use the cigarette lighter push it in all the way and let go When it s done heating it will pop back by itself NOTICE Holding a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating can make it overload damaging the lighter and the heating element Just push the lighter all the way in and let go When it s done heating it will pop back by itself 2 61 yellow One auxiliary power outlet is located at the rear of the center floor console for rear seat passengers to use The other auxiliary power outlet is located in the rear cargo area on the passenger s side Two auxiliary power outlets are located near the cigarette lighter Use these outlets to power mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems Sun Visors To block out glare you can swing down the visors You can also swing them out to help block glare at the front and side windows Your visors have a strap to hold small items such as maps The visors have an extender on the inside edge When the visor is down pull the extender out for extra glare coverage at the front or side The visors also have mirrors with lights The lights will come on when you lift the mirror cover yellow blue Universal Transmitter This transmitter allows you to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand held transmitters It will operate garage doors and gates or with
218. llowing the steps provided under Programming the Transmitter earlier in this section 2 66 yellow blue 2 Remove the cover panel from the garage door opener receiver It is located near the garage door opener motor 3 Locate the training button on the garage door opener receiver The exact location and color will vary among brands 4 Press the training button on the garage door opener receiver for one to two seconds 5 Return to your vehicle and press the programmed button on the universal transmitter until the red light flashes rapidly about two seconds 6 Release the button then press it again to confirm that it was programmed to the garage door opener receiver You may now use either the universal transmitter or the hand held transmitter to open your garage door If you still have difficulty in programming and require assistance please call 1 800 355 3515 Accessories Accessories for the universal transmitter are available from the manufacturer of the unit If you would like additional information please call 1 800 355 3515 Cellular Telephone If Equipped Your vehicle has been prewired for the dealer installation of a cellular telephone A fixed mobile system is available Voice activation and hands free operation are standard features For more information contact your dealer A user s guide is provided with the telephone yellow blue OnStar System If Equipped This system may be ordered thr
219. lp keep your vehicle in good condition Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections explains important inspections that your dealer s service department or another qualified service center should perform Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants lists some recommended products to help keep your vehicle properly maintained These products or their equivalents should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done Part E Maintenance Record provides a place for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle Whenever any maintenance is performed be sure to write it down in this part This will help you determine when your next maintenance should be done In addition it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we don t know exactly how you ll drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may even need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you dr
220. lue Folding the Rear Seat Your vehicle has a 60 40 rear seat either side may be folded down to give you more cargo space Before folding place the latch portion of the center safety belt in the center armrest That way the center safety belt will be out of the way when the seat is folded and also will be easily available for passengers to use when the seat is returned to the passenger position Also make sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat When the seat is folded it will lay flat on the floor To fold the seat pull up on the strap loop at the rear of the seat cushion Then pull the seat cushion up and fold it forward Fold the seatback forward enough to allow removal of the head restraints Push and hold the release buttons at the bottom of each head restraint height adjust post and slide the head restraint out of the height adjust tubes Set the head restraints aside for now You will stow them in their proper position after you are done folding the seat Pull the seatback forward and fold the seatback down until it is flat yellow blue Then stow the head restraints by sliding them into the rear of the seat cushion Make sure the posts go in all the way To return the seat to the passenger position first remove the head restraints by sliding them out of the seat cushion Lift the seatback up enough to install the head restraints Push the seatback rearward all the way Then lower th
221. luid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 27 000 Miles 45 000 km I Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first bo See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service MILEAGE SERVIC i Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first ee See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Continued ny A G yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Continued Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 33 000 Miles 55 000 km pop Change engine oil
222. me in a cab or if you re with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you re driving on snow or ice it s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle 4 6 yellow blue Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That s perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That s reaction time Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second But that s only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in 3 4 of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it s pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of th
223. mes the engine can get a little too hot when you Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving Idle for long periods in traffic Towatrailer See Driving on Grades in the Index If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 If your air conditioner is on turn it off 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary 3 If you re in a traffic jam shift to NEUTRAL N otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE 5 10 yellow blue If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning doesn t come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there s still no sign of steam push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you re parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away Cooling System When you decide it s safe to lift the hood here s what you ll see A Coolant Recovery Tank B Radiator Pressure Cap C Engine Fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling don t do anything else until
224. moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system s designed threshold level If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn t move or deform the threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph 14 to 26 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform such as a parked car the threshold level will be higher The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers side impacts or rear impacts because inflation would not help the occupant In any particular crash no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near frontal impacts The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt See Off Road Driving in the Index for more tips on off road driving yellow blue What makes an air bag inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the air bag The infla
225. move the parking turn signal lamps and sidemarker lamps see Headlamps previously in this section 1 The fog lamp bulb assembly is located under the front bumper 2 Remove the fog lamp bulb socket by turning it counterclockwise Remove the connector from the bulb by lifting the tabs on the sides of the connector Insert the new bulb into the connector until the tabs lock into the connector Insert the fog lamp bulb socket into the fog lamp housing and turn it clockwise one quarter of a turn yellow blue Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL The individual bulbs in the CHMSL are not replaceable See your dealer for assistance Rear Lamps 1 Open the tailgate or rear doors 2 Remove the two black plastic plugs from the rear lamp assembly access holes 3 Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws inside the fender and pull out the lamp assembly You may want to use a magnetic screwdriver when removing the screws 6 37 Remove the screws from the bulb retainer and take the bulb retainer off of the lamp assembly 5 Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket 6 Putin a new bulb and push it straight in until it is tight 7 Replace the bulb retainer 8 Replace the rear lamp assembly and tighten the screws You may want to use a magnetic screwdriver when installing the screws 9 Close the tailgate or rear doors 6 38 yellow blue Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
226. n It s a theft deterrent feature You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK OFF C This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel It doesn t lock the steering wheel like LOCK Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off for example if your vehicle is being pushed RUN D This is the position for driving START E This position starts your engine NOTICE If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can t turn it be sure you are using the correct key if so is it all the way in If it is then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard But turn the key only with your hand Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch If none of this works then your vehicle needs service 2 22 yellow blue Retained Accessory Power Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory Power RAP feature which will allow certain features of your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF Your radio power windows and console accessories will work when the ignition key is turned to RUN or ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF these features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened Starting Your Engine Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine won t start in any other position that s a
227. n increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up Ill be careful isn t the right answer What if there s an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There s something else about drinking and driving that many people don t know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking yellow blue Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please don t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride ho
228. n city streets rural roads or freeways it means always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance It s the best defensive driving maneuver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call reading or reaching for something on the floor makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do things like this or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It s the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are t
229. n many uses these will damage your vehicle Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach Reducing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt Wipe vinyl leather plastic and painted surfaces with a clean damp cloth Cleaning of Fabric and Carpet Your dealer has two cleaners Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner and Capture Non Solvent Dry Spot and Soil Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet They will clean normal spots and stains very well You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Here are some cleaning tips Always read the instructions on the cleaner label Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set 6 47 Carefully scrape off any excess stain Use a clean cloth or sponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn Ifaring forms on fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set Using Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner on Fabric 1 Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt 2 Always clean a whole trim panel or section Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines 3 Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on the container label to form thick suds 4 Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge Don t saturate the material and don t rub it roughly 5 As soon as you ve cleane
230. n off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased 2 45 Exterior Lamps DOME OVERRIDE Your parking headlamp knob is on the driver s side of your instrument panel Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamp symbol to turn on the following Parking Lamps Sidemarker Lamps 2 46 yellow blue Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights Turn the knob clockwise again to the master lighting symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps Turn the knob counterclockwise to OFF to turn off your lamps For additional information on headlamp operation see Headlamp Delay in the Index Turn the thumbwheel next to the knob up to adjust instrument panel lights Turn the thumbwheel up to the first notch to return the radio display and gearshift indicator LED display to full intensity when the headlamps or parking lamps are on To turn on the dome lamps with the vehicle doors closed turn the thumbwheel up to the second notch position You can switch your headlamps from high to low beam by pulling on the turn signal high beam lever A circuit breaker protects your headlamps If you have an electrical overload your headlamps will flicker on and off Have your headlamp wiring checked right away if this happens Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside your automatic headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at
231. n pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble 6 32 yellow blue Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop your disc brakes adjust for wear If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal your rear drum brakes may need adjustment Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you don t your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Fluid Leak Check After the vehicle has been parked for awhile inspect the surface under the vehicle for water oil fuel or other fluids Water dripping from the air conditioning system after it has been used is normal If you notice fuel leaks or fumes the causes should be found and corrected at once Battery Your new vehicle has
232. n take two forms blotchy ringlet shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this GM will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first 6 53 yellow blue GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 1052918 8 oz 0 237 L or All Protectant Protects leather wood acrylics Plexiglas plastic rubber and vinyl 1052925 16 oz 0 473 L Multi Purpose Interior Cleans carpets seats interior trim door panels Cleaner and floor mats See your General Motors Parts Department for these products For exterior use only See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Not recommended for use on instrument panels 6 54 Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UXXM072675 ENGINE 1999 ji ASSEMBLY CODE MODEL YEAR PLANT This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and r
233. nada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage yellow blue When contacting GMC please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you must file with the GM BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
234. nd cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index 6 42 yellow blue When It s Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire Youcan see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look at the Certification Tire label The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires get ones with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating t
235. nd to the proper torque specification 5 29 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place Store the flat tire where the spare tire is stored Put the tools into the storage box and close it tightly Fit the storage box on the bracket with the bolt through the box Put the jack onto the box Be sure the jack is stored as shown in the following illustrations The jack handle attachment point is circled in the following illustrations to show the direction the jack should face when it is stored properly Secure the emergency gloves if your vehicle has them to the jack using the provided strap Slide the retainer over the bolt onto the jack and put the wing nut on it Turn the nut clockwise until it is tight against the retainer 5 30 Replace the jack storage cover by simply reversing the removal procedure described earlier Jacking Tool Storage A Wheel Wrench B Jack Handle C Ratchet D Jack Storage Box E Jacking Tool Storage Box yellow blue yellow blue Jack Storage Spare Tire Storage A Retainer D Jack Storage Box A Hoist Assembly E Retainer B Nut E Bracket B Hoist Shaft F Valve Stem C Jack C Ratchet Pointed Down D Jack Handle G Spare Tire 5 31 Follow these instructions to
236. ndicator light will turn off and your automatic headlamps will turn on Check Gages Light This light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine CHECK GAGES If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving it could indicate a problem with your vehicle It could be yellow blue a problem with your oil pressure coolant temperature or some other problem Check your various gages to see if they are in the warning zones If they are have your vehicle serviced right away Headlamp High Beam Indicator Light The high beam indicator is on whenever you use your high beam headlamps For more details about high beams see Headlamp High Low Beam Changer in the Index Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator Lights The signal indicator will come on whenever you signal a turn or lane change See Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator in the Index 2 81 Fuel Gage When the ignition is on the fuel gage tells you about SS Wi VV 7j how much fuel you have 1 2 2 left in your tank E H The gage will first indicate E Empty before you are out of fuel and you should get more fuel as soon as possible 2 82 yellow blue Listed are four situations you may experience with your fuel gage Atthe gas station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads F Full Ittakesa little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated
237. ndicator of how hard your vehicle is working During a majority of the operation the gage will read 210 F 100 C or less If you are pulling a load or going up hills it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 260 F 160 C mark If the gage reaches the 260 F 160 C mark it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity The Problems on the Road section of this manual shows what to do See Engine Overheating in the Index 2 76 yellow blue Malfunction Indicator Lamp Service Engine Soon Light Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems SERVICE ENGINE SOON This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction yellow blue This light should come on as a check to show you it is NOTICE working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light doesn t come on have it repaired This lig
238. new track starts to play the track number will also appear Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed TAPE AUX With a disc loaded in the player and the radio playing press this button twice to play the remote compact disc To return to playing the radio press AM FM If the cassette tape player remote CD player and console mounted CD changer are all loaded press TAPE AUX to switch between the tape remote CD and CD changer EJECT Press this button on the remote player to eject a compact disc 3 16 yellow blue Console Mounted CD Changer With the compact disc changer you can play up to six discs continuously Normal size discs may be played using the slots supplied in the magazine You must first load the magazine with discs before you can play a compact disc Load the CDs from bottom to top placing the discs in the magazine label side up If you load a disc label side down the disc will not play and an error will occur Repeat this procedure for loading up to six discs in the magazine Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine slide open the door of the compact disc CD changer Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on the magazine yellow blue Close the door by sliding it all the way forward When the CD magazine is loaded the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine This will continue for up to one and a half minutes depending on
239. ng brake put your transmission in NEUTRAL N to rev up the engine and regain PARK P and turn off the engine Leave the forward momentum This won t work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill Do not shift the transfer Instead apply the regular brake to stop the case to NEUTRAL N when you leave the vehicle vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to Leave it in some gear REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you can t make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL N can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P This is because the NEUTRAL N position on the transfer case overrides the transmission You or someone else could be injured If you are going to leave your vehicle set the parking brake and shift the transmission to PARK P But do not shift the transfer case to the NEUTRAL N position Leave the transfer case in the 2 Wheel High 4 High or 4 Low position 4 21 Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you ll want
240. nob has four speed positions To increase airflow move the knob toward HI To decrease airflow move it toward LO To turn the fan off move the knob to OFF If you have the air conditioner on moving the fan knob to OFF also turns off the A C compressor In OFF while driving air will flow through the floor outlets The mode knob will not redirect the airflow to other selected outlet positions This is normal operation for the OFF position 3 2 yellow blue Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area of your vehicle This knob will allow you to adjust the relative air temperature independently of the function knob setting Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery The control knob can be placed in any position between any two mode settings to blend the flow of air gt o F4 VENT This setting directs air through the instrument panel outlets gt o Vad VENT HEAT Use this setting to divide airflow between the floor outlets and instrument panel outlets e tt HEATER This setting directs air through the floor outlets We ad DEFOG This setting directs air to the heater outlets and toward the windshield qp DEFROST This setting directs ai
241. note 9 000 Miles 15 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote 7 8 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 12 000 Miles 20 000 km Eug Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY mE p i SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first a See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote
242. nsole Storage 0 0 0 cee eee eee 2 55 2 56 Console Mounted CD Changer 3 16 Control of a Vehicle 0 2 0 cece eee eee 4 6 Convenience Net 0 00 c eee eee eee eee 2 58 Convex Outside Mirror 0 00 00 000 00 2 55 Coolant uber REF bad eESS EEPCReU m PS 6 23 7 41 Coolant Heater Engine 0000 2 24 Coolant Recovery Tank 0 00000 0000005 5 12 Cooling System 0 0 cece eee eee eee ee 5 11 Courtesy Transportation 0 00000 e eee eee 8 8 Crise Control n sa eedem pev RR sean 2 43 Cupholders 1 2 ee er RR ERE es 2 56 2 57 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users 8 4 Customer Assistance Information 8 1 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 4 8 2 Damage Finish if hdeGictavs nag tesiei Tinie 6 53 Damage Sheet Metal 0 00 00 0 00000 6 53 Daytime Running Lamps 2 0 0000 ee 2 47 Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light 2 81 Dead Battery cerre ccnp ced swe can a Regan Ies 353 Defects Reporting Safety 000 0 8 10 Defensive Driving 0 0 cece eee eese 4 2 Defogger Rear Window sees 3 7 DefOgEHEg sasae mairie Mais ode UR teresa 3 6 Deffosting 2i aderat etel planet b eo pdt hex 3 6 Dolby Noise Reduction 0 200005 3 11 Dome Lamps 2 me RR re gees 2 49 yellow blue Door Child Security Locks
243. nty booklet that contains detailed warranty information 8 9 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline 8 10 yellow blue REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you ll notify us Pl
244. o ate 4 12 Ne Convenience oe bague te da atum RS 2 58 Passlock o oo occ cece cece sss 2 20 2 80 Neutral Automatic Transmission 5 2 26 Periodic Maintenance Inspections 5 7 39 New Vehicle Break In 00 0000 ee eeeee 2 20 Power Night Vision ice e cett been ce ORG vlde deeds 4 29 Auxiliary Outlet coser erba ee aedenes 2 62 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 65 DoorLocks esses nne 2 4 Lumbar Adjustment 0000000005 1 3 O Option Fuses iis eV ss Rr IR VA eae elated 6 56 domefer oio oe eren ee teagan eed 2 71 Remote Control Mirror s esses 2 54 Odometer Trip creer mentem 2 71 DOOb cosa e EE EEE aae deis ET e i eines eus 1 2 Off Road Driving esses 4 14 Steering os eee eee ee beeen ete enhn 4 9 Off Road Recovery 000 0 cece cence eee 4 11 E Fluid 66 0 eee 6 27 t il Engine ccc cc eee ee eee 11 es 7 41 MTV CLO WS 4cuiuscode avrov hend edic ceat E E E td eiTe sec Y S st vO Greer om 2 67 Power Lumbar Adjustment 0 00 eee ee ee 1 3 De oe ene ur da M See Pregnancy Use of Safety Belts 1 22 Overdrive Automatic Transmission 2 27 Problems on the Road e occ cccccccccceeenee ene 5 1 Overheating Engine ILU PEE 5 9 Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts 6 52 Owner Checks and Services 000000000 ee 7 35 Publications Service and Owner
245. o pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don t get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone isn t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that if your right outside mirror is convex the vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you re being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahe
246. o properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it 1 45 yellow blue Top Strap If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored Anchor brackets for the rear outside seat positions are located on the floor in the cargo area 1 46 Routing the top strap for a child restraint over or under the cargo security shade could cause the shade to come loose and even break If this happens the shade could be thrown about the vehicle in a collision or sudden maneuver You or others could be injured When anchoring a top strap to a cargo tiedown be sure to remove the cargo security shade from your vehicle See Cargo Security Shade in the Index Don t use the front set of tie down brackets Anchor the top strap to the rearmost bracket on the same side of the vehicle as the child restraint If you need to have an anchor bracket installed for the center rear seat you can ask your dealer to put it in for you If you want to install the anchor yourself your dealer can tell you how to do it yellow blue Canadian law requires that child restraints have a top strap and that the strap be anchored If your child restraint has a top strap your dealer can obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation instructions specifically designed for this vehicle The dealer can then install the anchor for you This work will be done for you free of charge Or you may install the anchor you
247. o wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat to see how see Seats in the Index so you can sit up straight 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to OS A Me KO A J E Ry N A Dh SS D y LX yellow blue The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash 1 15 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Before you begin to drive move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you 1 16 yellow blue To move it down push in at the word PRESS and move the height adjuster to the desired position You can move the
248. ogether 4 Test the operation of the transmitter with your vehicle If the transmitter does not work try synchronizing the transmitter with the receiver Resynchronization Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security method used by this system The transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the receiver The receiver will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously This prevents anyone from recording and playing back the signal from the transmitter To resynchronize your transmitter stand close to your vehicle and simultaneously press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for at least eight seconds The door locks should cycle and the parking lamps and headlamps should flash to confirm synchronization If this does not happen you may need to replace the battery in your transmitter or match the transmitter to your vehicle If the locks still do not cycle see your dealer for service Rear Doors It can be dangerous to drive with the tailgate glass tailgate or rear doors open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the tailgate glass tailgate or rear doors open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the tailgate glass tailgate or rear doors Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your h
249. oil to break down sooner If any one of these is true for your vehicle then you need to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever occurs first If none of them is true use the long trip highway maintenance schedule Change the oil and filter every 6 14 yellow blue 7 500 miles 12 500 km or 12 months whichever occurs first Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Don t let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a real threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all free flowing oil from the filter before disposal Don t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help yellow blue Engine Air Cleaner Filter 2 The air cleaner a
250. ol Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use it 1 Move the cruise control switch to ON 2 Get up to the speed you want 3 Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This of course shuts off the cruise control But you don t need to reset it 2 44 yellow blue Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can move the cruise control switch from ON to R A Resume Accelerate for about half a second You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there Remember if you hold the switch at R A longer than half a second the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake So unless you want to go faster don t hold the switch at R A Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Push the SET button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You ll now cruise at the higher speed Move the cruise control switch from ON to R A Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch to R A for less than half a second Each time you do this your vehicle will go about 1 m
251. ommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your Used Replacement Wheels vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it s contacting your vehicle and don t spin your wheels See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index for more information If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause an accident If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 6 46 Appearance Care Remember cleaning products can be hazardous Some are toxic Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings and instructions And always open your doors or windows when you re cleaning the inside Never use these to clean your vehicle Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some more than others and they can all damage your vehicle too yellow blue Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can I
252. on This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for GMC whenever it appears in this manual Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it when you re on the road If you sell the vehicle please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it Litho in U S A S9909 B First Edition ii yellow blue g We support voluntary technician certification CERTIFIED WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE S For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual Aux propri taires canadiens Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais chez votre concessionaire ou au DGN Marketing Services Ltd 1577 Meyerside Dr Mississauga Ontario L5T 1B9 C Copyright General Motors Corporation 1998 All Rights Reserved How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If you do this it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle In this manual you ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly Index A good place to look for what you need is the
253. once a month or more Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles 10 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It s Time for New Tires and Wheel Replacement later in this section for more information The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals yellow blue When rotating your tires always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification Tire label Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque in the Index 6 41 Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off a
254. oof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible You ll find other important information in this manual See Vehicle Loading Luggage Carrier and Tires in the Index 4 15 Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns GM recognizes these concerns and urges every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving obey all posted regulations Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment shrubs flowers trees grasses or disturb wildlife this includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground Always carry a litter bag make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system 4 16 yellow blue Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your tri
255. ooling System Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first These intervals only summarize maintenance services Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be performed after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes T The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Lubricate the front suspension kingpin bushings steering linkage transmission shift linkage transfer case shift linkage parking brake cable guides front axle propshaft spline and brake pedal springs Ball joints and kingpin bushings should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10 F 12 C or higher or they could be damaged A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection
256. oors unlocking the driver s doors and releasing the tailgate or panel doors Your transmitter is now ready to match the vehicle 4 Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the first transmitter for 15 seconds The vehicle will respond as in Step 3 5 Repeat Step 4 for the remaining transmitters 6 When you have finished matching all of your transmitters replace the RADIO fuse Fuse 17 7 Check that all transmitters work by pressing their buttons If the transmitters don t work or if you d rather not match the transmitters yourself see your dealer yellow blue Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won t work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it s probably time to change the battery NOTICE When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter Use one three volt type CR2032 or equivalent battery To replace the battery 1 Insert a small coin or flathead screwdriver to separate the bottom of the transmitter from the top 2 Remove the battery and replace it with a new one making sure the positive side of the battery is facing down 2 10 yellow blue 3 Snap the top and bottom t
257. oper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance procedures are important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition please maintain your vehicle properly How This Section is Organized The remainder of this section is divided into five parts Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services shows what to have done and how often Some of these services can be complex so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should let your dealer s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt have a qualified technician do the work If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle you will probably want to get the service information See Service and Owner Publications in the Index yellow blue Part B Owner Checks and Services tells you what should be checked and when It also explains what you can easily do to he
258. ormation See footnote 7 14 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km 51 000 Miles 85 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote yellow blue DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 15 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 54 000 Miles 90 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check const
259. ou leave the vehicle with 3 Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not the engine running it could overheat and even eee catch fire You or others could be injured Don t 4 Turn the ignition key to LOCK leave your vehicle with the engine running unless 5 Remove the key and take it with you If you can you have to leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand your vehicle is in PARK P Move the lever up as far as it will go 2 34 If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you move the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you If you can it means that the shift lever wasn t fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you don t shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P in the Index When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake I
260. ough your dealer if you have the proper fixed cellular telephone The following services are available 24 hours a day Roadside Service with Location Emergency Services Button Remote Door Unlock e Theft Detection Notification and Stolen Vehicle Tracking Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment Customer Convenience Services For more information contact your dealer 2 67 yellow blue Instrument Panel y c c mommonoms s Dome Lamp Switch Lamp Controls Air Outlets Multifunction Lever Instrument Panel Cluster Gearshift Lever Rear Window Wiper Washer Switch Audio System Comfort Control System Glove Box Ashtray cHemBo vozzr yellow blue Cupholder Auxiliary Power Outlets Storage Area or Compact Disc Player If Equipped Rear Window Defogger Switch Fog Lamp Switch Automatic Transfer Case Switch Tilt Lever Parking Brake Release Hood Release Fuse Block 2 69 Instrument Panel Cluster AIR 229 ee cO wma oon l y SERVICE ENGINE SOON 3 RPM 1000 o f pur TUI yellow blue SERVICE 4WD Oe SECURITY BRAKE ANTI LOCK wp SS 60 70 A D SS S 40 S 3 S 30 60 pp I L My ev M 100 260 SM 0 E E7 APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK
261. our dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index yellow blue Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the start a fire These include liquids like gasoline container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others occurs To help avoid injury to you and others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill Dispense gasoline only into approved things that will burn onto a hot engine containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Don t smoke while pumping gasoline Hood Release To open the hood first pull the handle inside the vehicle yellow blue Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the secondary hood release located just to the passenger s sid
262. ow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads You should tow in OVERDRIVE You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions 4 46 yellow blue Three important considerations have to do with weight the weight of the trailer the weight of the trailer tongue and the weight on your vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle The trailer should never weigh more than 6 500 lbs 2 951 kg But even that can be too heavy Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum t
263. ow blue Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they ll keep going Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Don t leave a seat folded down unless you need to There s also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving in the Index Towing a Trailer If you don t use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle yellow blue NOTICE Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehic
264. p especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Does your vehicle have a winch If so be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck But you ll want to know how to use it properly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It s a good idea to practice in an area that s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off road driving does require some new and different driving skills Here s what we mean Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds With your arms hands feet and body you ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some things to keep in mind At higher speeds you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles you have less time to react you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles you ll need more di
265. pect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks Inspect other brake parts including drums wheel cylinders calipers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants NOTE Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Engine Oil Engine Oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines Starburst symbol of the proper viscosity To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil in the Index 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only GM Goodwrench DEX COOL or Havoline DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant in the Index Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 119 Brake Fluid System GM Part No 12377967 or equivalent DOT 3 Brake Fluid Engine Coolant yellow blue USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Windshield GM Optikleen Washer Solvent Washer Solvent GM Part No 1051515 or equivalent Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB GM Power Steering Fluid GM
266. pected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip Keep the rear most windows closed If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window in the rear or another opening drive with your front main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed This will bring fresh outside air into your vehicle Do not use the recirculation button or MAX because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index 4 49 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working 4 50 yellow blue Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahe
267. ph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control Push in the SET button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want then release it To slow down in very small amounts push the button for less than half a second Each time you do this you ll go 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may have to step on the yellow blue accelerator pedal to maintain your speed If the steepness of the hill causes the vehicle speed to drop more than 15 mph 24 km h below the set speed your cruise control will automatically disengage When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don t use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal or Move the cruise control switch to OFF Erasing Speed Memory When you tur
268. place the air filter See Owner Checks and Services in the Index Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Don t drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off NOTICE If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you re driving yellow blue Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change both the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 100 000 miles 166 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at your GMC dealers
269. plete Ot Ro yellow blue 7 Shift the transmission to REVERSE R for one second then shift to AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE for one second 8 Turn the ignition to OFF 9 Place the transmission shift lever in PARK P 10 Release the parking brake prior to towing Shifting Out of Neutral To shift out of neutral 1 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal 2 Start the vehicle with the transmission in PARK P 3 Press the button for the desired transfer case shift position 2HI 4HI AUTO 4WD or 4LO 4 Putthe transmission in NEUTRAL N 5 Shift the transmission lever to the desired position After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL the red light will go out 2 31 Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the lever located just above the parking brake pedal marked BRAKE RELEASE to release the parking brake If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released the brake system warning light will go off 2 32 yellow blue NOTICE Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat You may have to replace them and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle If you are towing a tra
270. pper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Tire Loading in the Index Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow If you ll be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than the capacity stamped on your step bumper be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you re driving 4 48 yellow blue Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle see Carbon Monoxide in the Index Dirt and water can too Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer man
271. press on LOCK Your headlamps and parking lamps will flash briefly upon any press on UNLOCK To change the factory setting do the following 1 Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter 2 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for 3 Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter until you hear the number of chimes that correspond to the mode selection you want Mode 1 All Off The headlamps will not flash and the horn will not sound to provide you feedback that a lock unlock command has been received by the keyless entry transmitter 2 17 Mode 2 Horn and Lamps Lamps Your horn will sound briefly and your headlamps and parking lamps will flash when you press LOCK on the keyless entry transmitter Only your headlamps and parking lamps will flash when you press UNLOCK Mode 3 Horn and Lamps Your horn will sound briefly and your headlamps and parking lamps will flash every time you push LOCK or UNLOCK Mode 4 Lamps Your headlamps and parking lamps will flash every time you press LOCK or UNLOCK Mode 5 Lamps Horn and Lamps Lamps Your headlamps and parking lamps will flash upon the first press on LOCK your headlamps and parking lamps will flash and your horn will sound upon the second press on LOCK and your headlamps and parking lamps will flash upon any press on UNLOCK Theft Deterrent Arming Method Your vehicle comes with
272. pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle yellow blue Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish NOTICE Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks 6 51 Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicl
273. ps Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires in the Index 4 32 aAaA eee City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals yellow blue Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You ll save time and energy See the next part Freeway Driving Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light 4 33 Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right
274. r Assistance Center P O Box 436008 Pontiac MI 48343 6008 1 800 GMC 8782 1 800 462 8782 1 800 462 8583 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 GMC 8782 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 All Overseas Locations GMODC Customer Communication Centre 169 007 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Telephone 905 644 4112 Fax 905 644 4866 Caribbean Numbers 1 800 496 9992 English Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9993 Spanish Puerto Rico 1 800 751 4135 English Dominican Republic 1 800 751 4136 Spanish Dominican Republic 1 800 496 9994 U S Virgin Islands 1 800 389 0009 Bahamas 1 800 534 0122 Bermuda Barbados Antigua amp B V I yellow blue If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean call Puerto Rico 1 787 763 1315 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle hand controls wheelchair scooter lifts etc This program can also provide you with free resource information such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers The program is av
275. r leaking See footnote 7 19 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 78 000 Miles 130 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 81 000 Miles 135 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 84 000 Miles 140 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote 7 20 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance
276. r thaw them If your blades do become damaged get new blades or blade inserts Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected from overload by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload overload due to heavy snow etc may cause wiper linkage damage Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using your windshield wipers 2 41 Windshield Washer At the top of the lever there s a paddle with the word PUSH on it To spray washer fluid on the In freezing weather don t use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision 2 42 windshield push the paddle yellow blue Washer fluid will spray as long as you push the paddle When you let go of the paddle the wipers will continue to wipe for a few seconds and then either stop or return to the preset speed The use of hood mounted air deflectors may adversely affect windshield wiper and washer performance Rear Window Wiper and Washer The rear window wiper washer switch is on your instrument panel to the right of the gage cluster To turn the wiper on slide the switch all the way up For delay wiping slide the switch even with DELAY in the center position of the rear wiper control The wiper wil
277. r the this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the engine cooling fan filler neck reinstall the pressure cap Be sure the 7 By this time the coolant level inside the radiator arrows onthe pr ssitre cap Pine UD like this filler neck may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck Engine Fan Noise Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan When the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages So you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine It will go away as the fan clutch disengages 5 18 yellow blue If a Tire Goes Flat It s unusual for a tire to blow out while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly
278. r toward the windshield Rear Air Conditioning You can increase and decrease the airflow at the rear vents You can also send cooled air to the rear of the vehicle Your vehicle has rear air conditioning without rear heater The controls are located above the front and second seats The front and rear overhead controls let you increase and decrease the airflow at the rear vents To operate the rear air conditioning system the front air conditioning system must be on With the front air conditioning system off the rear system controls can be used to circulate air in the rear of the vehicle yellow blue To operate the rear system using the front control just turn the knob to the blower position you want To use the rear control first turn the front control knob to REAR CNTL Then the rear control can be used to increase and decrease the airflow 3 4 yellow blue Air Conditioning On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot air inside escape This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best The recirculation button between the fan and temperature knobs allows the air inside your vehicle to be recirculated This setting helps to maximize your air conditioner s performance and your vehicle s fuel economy This setting also cools the air the fastest and can be used to keep unwanted odors and or dust from entering the veh
279. r vehicle 2 72 yellow blue When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts unless the driver s safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds then it will flash for about 55 seconds If the driver s belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows AIR BAG The system checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the air bag sensors the air bag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the air bag system see Air Bag in the Index This light will come on when you start your engine AIR and it will flash for a few B AG seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready If the air bag readiness light stays on after you st
280. r vehicle For example These symbols These symbols These symbols These symbols Here are some these symbols are important have to do with are on some of are used on other symbols are used on an for you and your lamps your controls warning and you may see original battery your passengers indicator lights whenever your A MASTER l WINDSHIELD CAUTION pb 5 LIGHTING 5 ef WIPER Nw POSSIBLE SWITCH ENGINE INJURY COOLANT jon E ma PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING PT TEMP DOOR LOCK TURN amp p WINDSHIELD UNLOCK SIGNALS WASHER BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM noes LI SP qm WARNING A FLASHER REAR COOLANT m SPEAKER n WINDOW m PARKING M CAUSTIC LAMPS i WINDSHIELD BURNS AVOID SPARKS OR FLANES power CaL DAYTIME DEFOGGER winpow 9 RUNNING O LAMPS BATTERY FASTEN ACID COULD ke SEAT DEFROSTER CRUSE BELTS HAZARD ENGINE OIL QE PRESSURE d FUEL ANTI LOCK Ges BRAKES SPARKOR ali DONIS Ew VENTILATING EXPLODE AIR BAG TN FOG LAMPS x FAN BATTERY Model Reference This manual covers this model 4 Door Utility vi yellow blue yellow blue Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts 2 Seats and Seat Controls 1 34 9 Safety Belts They re for Everyone 13 Here
281. raction ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle If your tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type bias bias belted or radial as your original tires yellow blue Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle 6 43 Uniform Tire Quality Grading The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spar
282. railer weight You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity yellow blue If you re using a weight carrying hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B If you re using a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer 4 47 Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the u
283. ram for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs Plan Ahead When Possible When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If it is determined that your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately and is still operative you are encouraged to drive the vehicle until scheduling can be accomplished 8 8 yellow blue If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle Off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GMC helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealerships can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This
284. rammed a universal channel proceed to Step 2 Otherwise hold down the two outside buttons on the universal transmitter until the red light begins to flash rapidly approximately 20 seconds Then release the buttons This procedure initializes the memory and erases any previous settings for all three channels 2 Hold the end of the hand held transmitter against the bottom surface of the universal transmitter so that you can still see the red light 3 Decide which one of the three channels you want to program Using both hands press the hand held transmitter button and the desired button on the universal transmitter Continue to hold both buttons through Step 4 4 Hold down both buttons until you see the red light on the universal transmitter flash rapidly The rapid flashing which could take up to 90 seconds indicates that the universal transmitter has been programmed Release both buttons once the light starts flashing rapidly If you have trouble programming the universal transmitter make sure that you have followed the directions exactly as described and that the battery in the hand held transmitter is not dead If you still cannot program it rotate the hand held transmitter end over end and try again The universal transmitter may not work with older garage door openers that do not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated attempts consult your GM dealer yellow
285. restore a spare or flat tire 1 Lay the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle Position the tire so that the valve stem is pointed down and to the rear of the vehicle 2 Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel opening Make sure that the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel 3 Attach the ratchet with the UP mark facing you near the hook at the end of the jack handle Insert the other end on an angle through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft 4 Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle Continue turning the ratchet clockwise until there are two clicks or ratchets The spare tire hoist cannot be over tightened 5 Grasp and push against the tire to be sure it is stored securely and does not move 5 32 yellow blue If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you don t want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you re stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you re stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Don t spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer
286. rier which you can use to load things on top of your vehicle The luggage carrier has slats and side rails attached to the roof and crossrails which can be moved toward the front or the rear in the side rails to help secure cargo Tie the load to the tie loops or crossrails 2 59 NOTICE Loading cargo that weighs more than 200 Ibs 90 6 kg on the luggage carrier may damage your vehicle When you carry large things never let them hang over the rear or the sides of your vehicle Load your cargo so that it rests on the slats and does not scratch or damage the vehicle Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it securely to the luggage carrier Don t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading Your Vehicle in the Index To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you re driving check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened Be sure the cargo is properly loaded 2 60 yellow blue Ifsmall heavy objects are placed on the roof place the load in the area over the rear wheels If you need to cut a piece of 3 8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails and side rails to spread the load Tie the load to the crossrails or the side rail supports Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding If you need to carry long items move the crossrails as far apart as they will
287. road Please contact your dealership if any error recurs or cannot be corrected yellow blue PREV 1 Press this button to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played Press PREV again to go to the previous track on the disc NEXT 3 Press this button to advance to the next track on the disc REV 4 Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track As the CD reverses elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage FWD 6 Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track As the CD advances elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage SEEK Press the left arrow while playing a CD to go back to the start of the current track It will go back to the current track if more than eight seconds have played Press the left arrow again to go to previous tracks Press the right arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc RANDOM Press P SCAN to enter the random play mode RANDOM will appear on the display While in this mode the tracks on the discs will be played in random order If you press SEEK PREV or NEXT while in the random mode the previous or next track will be scanned randomly Press P SCAN again to turn off RANDOM and return to normal operation 3 15 RECALL Press this button to see what track is currently playing Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing When a
288. rs behind you yellow blue are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well You should tow in AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in PARK P for a few minutes before turning the engine off If you do get the overheat warning see Engine Overheating in the Index 4 51 yellow blue Parking on Hills 5 Besure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL N 6 Release the regular brakes You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured an
289. rs work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key isn t in To turn off the flashers push the button until the first click and release When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals won t work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle But please use the following steps to do it safely Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you don t follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you yellow blue NOTICE Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn t be covered by your warranty The ACDelco Freedom battery in your vehicle has a built in hydrometer Do not charge test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won t work and it could damage your vehicle yellow blue 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles
290. rself using the instructions provided in the kit 1 47 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position g You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Put the restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 1 48 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to yellow blue 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock yellow 5 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safe
291. s gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion yellow blue Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill you need to take some special steps Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel Geta smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed Don t use more power than you need because you don t want your wheels to start spinning or sliding Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up 4 19 Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you re there Use your headlamps even during the day They make you more visible to oncoming traffic Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert 4 20 yellow blue Q What should I do if my vehicle st
292. s for proper hook up routing and condition Check that the purge valve works properly if equipped Replace as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnoteT Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 17 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 63 000 Miles 105 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 66 000 Miles 110 000 km EO Oooo o Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and ad
293. s in the switches show which setting you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service An indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift it will return to the last chosen setting If the SERVICE 4WD light stays on you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service See Service 4WD in the Index for further information Shifting to 4HI or AUTO 4WD Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD switch This can be done at any speed and the indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed Shifting to 2HI Press and release the 2HI switch This can be done at any speed 2 30 yellow blue Shifting to 4LO To shift to 4LO the vehicle s engine must be running and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 4 8 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Press and release the 4LO switch You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the 4LO indi
294. s pressed twice within five seconds This allows for silent operation of locking and unlocking unless a confirming horn chirp is desired Other options may be selected for this feature see Feature Customization in the Index yellow blue Matching Transmitter s To Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it Have each transmitter you intend to match ready for the next steps To match transmitters to your vehicle Turn the ignition to RUN then to OFF This will disarm the theft deterrent system 2 Remove the RADIO fuse Fuse 17 This fuse is located in the main fuse block which is located on the left side of your main instrument panel When the fuse block is open the radio fuse is located on the lower right hand corner of your instrument panel See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index 3 Tum the ignition from OFF to RUN three times quickly within five seconds The vehicle will respond by locking the d
295. safety feature To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only NOTICE Don t try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped How to Start the Engine Without pushing the accelerator pedal turn your ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm NOTICE Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter 2 If it doesn t start right away hold your key in START If it doesn t start in 10 seconds push the accelerator pedal all the way down for five more seconds unless it starts sooner 3 If your engine still won t start or starts but then stops wait 15 seconds and start over When the engine starts let go of the key and the accelerator pedal yellow blue NOTICE Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you don t your engine might not perform properly If you ever have to have your vehicle towed see the part of this man
296. see iv Windows Lockout Switch 00 00000 2 38 Identification Number 00000 e seus 6 55 Windows Power 0 00 cece eee teens 2 38 Lo ding z Le ixi mE IRI RIX d REEEROG 4 43 Windshield Washer eeseeee esses 2 42 Loading for Off Road Driving 4 15 Fluid 1s esee ee oa beds RE 2 42 6 28 7 41 SLOPE SE rm 6 33 Fluid Level Check 0 cece eee ee eri 7 35 Ventilation System 1 0 0 0 ee eee eee eee 3 5 Rear cll eM e x eas bee eas ERE RES 2 42 MISOIS S UE balas t neci teen leads et p TE hd 2 63 Windshield Wipers 0 000 ce eee eee eee 2 41 oun MD 2 74 Blade Replacement 0005 6 38 6 64 Cleaning the Blades 0 008 6 50 W FUSES ico 6 56 arning Devices 2 eene 5 2 Re aee ea A e tinea od 2 42 Warning ae Gages and Indicators i Winter Driving lssssseess eee 4 38 Warranty Information 0 00 eee ee ees x TM E Washer Fluid Windshield 220 2000 20 0 220000 6 28 7 41 Witne Hamess Trier LLL 83 Washing Your Vehicle 0 00 cece esses 6 51 Wiring Headlamp REM AMD URN eee On 6 56 Weatherstrip Lubrication 00000 7 36 Wrecker TOW Ng MNT NUNT 5 8 Weatherstrips 2 0 0 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 6 50 7 36 Wrench Wheel cece ccc ss ssssssn 5 20 Wheel Alignmeht e srpen edet periere dave a ray Oke eases 6
297. soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty 2 79 Security Light This light will come on briefly when you turn the key to START SECURITY The light will stay on until the engine starts If the light flashes the Passlock System has entered a tamper mode If the vehicle fails to start see Passlock in the Index If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays on there may be a problem with the Passlock System Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock and you should see your GM dealer 2 80 yellow blue Service Four Wheel Drive Warning Light Your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Four Wheel Drive Transfer Case It has a computer which controls the four wheel drive system This light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition as a check to show you it is working SERVICE 4WD If the SERVICE 4WD light comes on there may be a problem with the Automatic Four Wheel Drive system and service is required Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing a malfunction Daytime Running Lamps DRL Indicator Light This light will go on whenever the DRL are on When it begins to get dark the DRL i
298. ssembly has an indicator that lets you know when the air filter is dirty and needs to be serviced The indicator is located in the air intake tube between the air cleaner and the engine See Owner Checks and Services in the Index to determine when to check the indicator Your air cleaner is located between the battery and coolant recovery tank If the area inside the clear section of the indicator is green no air filter service is required When the area inside the indicator is orange and CHANGE AIR FILTER appears the filter should be replaced 6 15 yellow To remove the air filter 1 Unhook the retainer clips and remove the cover 2 Liftthe filter and the connected duct out of the air cleaner housing Hold the duct and remove the filter by both pulling and twisting the filter away from the duct Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible 3 Clean the filter sealing surface of the duct and the filter housing Install the new filter by pushing it all the way to the stop on the duct Install the duct and the filter into the air cleaner housing Make sure that the duct fits properly into the housing 6 Install the cover and fasten the two retaining clips 7 After the air filter is properly serviced the indicator should be reset Push the button on top of the indicator to reset it to the green clean filter zone Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to re
299. st be removed to provide clearance for headlamp removal 2 Pull the parking turn signal assembly toward the side of the vehicle until the tabs are out of the grille A Turn Signal Bulb B Sidemarker Bulb 3 To remove a bulb turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it from the assembly 4 Install the parking turn signal lamp assembly by sliding it from the side of the vehicle toward the center until the tabs fully engage the grille 5 Install and tighten the two phillips head screws yellow 1 Remove the parking turn signal assembly as described previously 2 Remove the two turn signal bulb sockets and the sidemarker bulb socket from the parking turn signal assembly by turning them counterclockwise 3 Set the parking turn signal assembly to the side 4 Remove the two bolts at the top of the radiator support as shown 5 Pull the headlamp assembly out 6 Turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove it 7 Unplug the electrical connector 8 Putthe new bulb into the lens assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight 9 Plug in the electrical connector 10 Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the vehicle Install and tighten the two bolts 11 Install the two turn signal bulb sockets and the sidemarker bulb socket into the parking turn signal bulb assembly 12 Install the parking turn signal assembly Install and tighten the two phillips head screws yellow For the procedure to re
300. stance for braking especially since you re on an unpaved surface When you re driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you re driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear safety belts yellow blue Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the kind of surface you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you re not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider Isthe path ahead clear Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There s more discussion of these subjects later Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly 4
301. t or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot 1 10 yellow blue Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it s just a seat on wheels yellow Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider doesn t stop yellow The person keeps going until stopped by something or the instrument panel In a real vehicle it could be the windshield yellow blue Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers Q Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I m wearing a safety belt A You could be whether you re wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you re upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted Q If my vehicle has air bags why should I have to wear safety belts A Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does safety belts not instead of them Every air bag You get more time to stop You stop over more distance system ever offered for sale has required the use of and your strongest bones
302. t to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you re ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you re not fresh such as after a day s work don t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it s ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course you ll find experienced and able service experts in GMC dealerships all across North America They ll be ready and willing to help if you need it yellow blue Here are some things you can check before a trip Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades Are they in good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure Weather Forecasts What s the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system Maps Do you have up to date maps 4 35 Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as
303. t eee 7 37 Bulb Replacement 005 6 34 6 61 Canadian Roadside Assistance suse 8 7 Capacities and Specifications 000 6 63 Carbon Monoxide 2 11 2 36 2 37 4 41 4 48 4 49 Cargo Security Shade 0 eee eee eee 2 58 Cargo Tie Downs 00 ce eee eee eee ee 2 59 Cassette Deck Service 0 00 02 eee eee ee 7 35 Cassette Tape Player 00 cece eee eee 3 8 Cassette Tape Player Care esses 3 22 Cassette Tape Player Errors 0000 3 11 CD Changer iex Re eue ibd eod Poe 3 16 Cellular Telephone 0 0 0 0 00 eee eee 2 67 Center High Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement 6 37 Center Passenger Position 00005 1 36 Certification Tire Label 0 00005 4 43 Chains Safety sis ekeentens ewes pep Ua eR 4 48 Chains Tire pen cese Ntra e Ere a REID ER 6 46 Changing a Flat Tire 00 0 0 eee eee 5 19 Charging System Warning Light 2 73 Check Gages Light 0000 00 00 eee 2 81 9 2 yellow blue Checking Your Restraint Systems 1 57 Chemical Paint Spotting 0 000 6 53 Child Restraints 00 00 cee e eee eee eee eee 1 41 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position 1 48 Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position 1 50 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position 1 52 LOD Strap 2 2 ciet
304. t is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information yellow blue Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealerships and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion General Motors and participating dealerships reserve the right to deny a rental vehicle to anyone not possessing a valid motor vehicle operators license in their name anyone who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs or anyone whose mental or physical abilities are impaired so as to be unable to operate a motor vehicle safely Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warra
305. t upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight Under certain circumstances as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance your compass could give false readings To adjust for compass variance 1 Press and hold the COMP switch located at the bottom of the mirror for three seconds until a zone number appears in the display 2 53 2 Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map 3 Press the COMP switch on the bottom of the mirror until the new zone number appears in the display After you stop pressing the switch in the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds 2 54 yellow blue Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors The electric mirrors can be adjusted to point where you want from inside the vehicle Select the mirror you want to move by moving the center of the switch located on the driver s door armrest to L left or R right Then adjust the mirror angle by pressing the outer arrows on the switch until the mirror is adjusted where you want it The center position turns the electric mirrors off Electrochromic Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors The outside rearview mirrors feat
306. tane fuel to get rid of pinging It s the heavy constant knock that means you have a problem If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards indicated on the underhood emission control label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and or your vehicle may fail a smog check test If this occurs return to your authorized GMC dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask your service station operator whether or not his fuel contains MMT General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines If fuels containing MMT are used spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GMC dealer for service 6 4 yellow blue To provide cleaner air all g
307. tant when outside temperatures are below freezing Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off road frequently You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle If the vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner yellow blue Short Trip City Intervals Every 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or 3 months whichever occurs first Chassis Lubrication or 3 months whichever occurs first Drive Axle Service or 3 months whichever occurs first Every 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Tire Rotation Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Fuel Filter Replacement Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transmission Service severe conditions only Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Fuel Tank Cap and Lines Inspection Exhaust Gas Recirculation System Inspection Evaporative Control System Inspection Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Automatic Transmission Service normal conditions Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV Valve Inspection Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Service or every 60 months
308. tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset 3 11 CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature use the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active 4 Insert the adapter It will power up the radio and begin playing This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed 3 12 yellow blue Rear Seat Audio RSA This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any of the music sources including AM FM cassette tapes and CDs However the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to For example rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape through headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones Be aware that the front seat audio controls always override the Rear Seat Audio RSA controls Note that if the front seat passengers switch the sour
309. ten to check the lubricant See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index yellow blue How to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 21 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you may need to add some lubricant When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1 2 inch 12 mm below the filler plug hole yellow When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index The radiator pressure cap must be tightly installed with the arrows on the cap lined up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck NOTICE Your radiator cap is a 15 psi 105 kPa pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating Be sure the arrows on the cap l
310. terest and a list of GMC dealers along the route Also included is a list of hotels along the route that are discounted through affiliation with Quest International Trip Routing is available through Roadside Assistance by calling 1 800 GMC 8782 Please be prepared to provide your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Allow five working days for fulfillment Trip Interruption Assistance GMC will reimburse any reasonable trip interruption expenses up to 500 00 when directly associated with warranty disablement Trip Interruption service covers expenses such as meals and overnight lodging if vehicle disablement occurs at least 150 miles 240 km from your home or rental property Please Note you will be required to obtain prior approval from GMC Roadside Assistance and pay for expenses at the time of disablement Original receipts should be submitted to GMC Roadside Assistance for reimbursement A service representative will provide assistance when you call The Roadside Assistance services listed are available to retail and retail lease customers operating 1999 GMC light duty trucks for a period of 3 years 36 000 miles 60 000 km All services must be pre arranged by GMC Roadside Assistance Over the phone assistance such as providing the name of the closest dealer or minor technical advice etc is available to all owner operators of GMC trucks regardless of vehicle or mileage Just dial GMC Roadside Assistance at 1 800 GMC 878
311. tery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine 11 Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery part of the vehicle with the dead battery If it won t start after a few tries it probably needs service 12 Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting Take care that they don t touch each other or any other metal 9 Attach the cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less A Heavy Metal Engine Part 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while B Good Battery C Dead Battery Towing Your Vehicle To help avoid serious personal injury to you or others Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck Always secure the vehicle on each side with separate safety chains when towing it Use only the correct hooks yellow blue NOTICE Use the proper towing equipment to avoid damage to the bumper fascia or fog lamp areas of the vehicle With current trends in automotive styles and design it is essential that the correct towing equipment is used to tow a vehicle Your vehicle can be towed with wheel lift equ
312. the number of discs loaded To eject the magazine from the player slide the CD changer door all the way open then press EJECT Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer the CD changer symbol will appear on the radio display If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs the CD symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play When a CD begins playing a disc and track number will be displayed The disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine All of the CD changer functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for ejecting the CD magazine 3 17 PREV 1 Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to go to the previous track if the current selection has been playing for less than eight seconds If the PREV button is pressed and the current selection has been playing for more than eight seconds it will go to the beginning of the current selection If you hold or press this button more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc The sound will mute while seeking PROG 2 Press this button to select a disc The disc number and track number will be displayed NEXT 3 Press this button or the SEEK right arrow to go to the next track If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc The sound
313. the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up The gage doesn t go back to E Empty when you turn off the ignition None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage For information on how to fill your fuel tank see Fuel Filling Your Tank in the Index For your fuel tank capacity see Fuel Tank Capacity in the Index yellow blue Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section you ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle 3 2 Comfort Controls 3 12 CD Adapter Kit 3 3 Rear Air Conditioning 3 12 Rear Seat Audio RSA 3 4 Air Conditioning 3 14 Remote Compact Disc Player If Equipped 3 5 Heating 3 16 Console Mounted CD Changer 3 5 Ventilation System 3 19 Theft Deterrent Feature 3 6 Defogging and Defrosting 3 21 Understanding Radio Reception 3 7 Rear Window Defogger 3 21 Tips About Your Audio System 3 7 Audio Systems 3 22 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3 7 Setting the Clock 3 24 Care of Your Compact Discs 3 8 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player 3 24 Fixed Mast Antenna Comfort Controls Heater and Air Conditioning Control System Fan Knob The knob on the left side of the heating system control panel controls the fan speed The k
314. this feature set in Mode 3 This means that both your keyless entry transmitter and the power door lock switch will actively arm the system To change the factory setting do the following 1 Press the UNLOCK switch on the door 2 18 yellow blue 2 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for 3 Press the UNLOCK switch on the door until you hear the number of chimes that correspond to the mode selection you want Mode 1 Alarm System Off The system will not arm Mode 2 Keyless Entry Transmitter Lock When you lock your doors using the keyless entry transmitter the system will arm Mode 3 Keyless Entry Transmitter Power Door Lock Switch If you use either the keyless entry transmitter or the power door lock switch to lock the doors the system will arm Mode 4 Passive arming and Keyless Entry Transmitter Power Door Lock Switch Arming The system will arm itself after all doors are closed plus arming per mode 3 Theft Deterrent Arming Verification Your vehicle comes with the theft deterrent arming verification set in Mode 3 This means that if you arm the system using the keyless entry transmitter your headlamps and parking lamps will flash and your horn will chirp twice to verify that the system is armed If it only chirps once the tailgate or the panel doors are open or unlatched In addition if the system did not arm the horn will chirp once and th
315. tion 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the driver s side of your vehicle Gasoline vapor is highly flammable It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries Don t smoke if you re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from gasoline yellow blue While refueling let the cap hang by the tether below the fuel filler neck To remove the cap turn it slowly to the left counterclockwise If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill gasoline Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle in the Index yellow blue When you put the cap back on turn it to the right clockwise until you hear a clicking sound Make sure you fully install the cap The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index NOTICE If you need a new cap be sure to get the right type Y
316. tion you can play one compact disc CD at a time To load a CD into the player hold the disc with the label side up and insert it carefully into the player approximately halfway The disc will automatically be pulled into the player If the radio is off and the ignition is on when a CD is inserted the radio will turn on and begin playing the CD It is possible to load and unload CDs with the ignition off To load a disc with the ignition off press the EJECT button on the remote player and then insert the disc To remove the disc press the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in the remote CD player will be pulled back into the player after approximately 30 seconds This protects the disc and player from damage The disc will not start playing To remove the disc press the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player All of the compact disc functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for EJECT When a disc is in the player a CD symbol will appear on the display When a disc is playing the letters CD will appear next to the CD symbol in the bottom left corner The track number will also be displayed If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the display it could be that The disc is upside down Itis dirty scratched or wet There s too much moisture in the air Wait about an hour and try again You are driving on a very rough
317. tnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnoteT 7 27 yellow blue Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 37 500 Miles 62 500 km o Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 12 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additiona
318. to consider a number of things How steep is the downhill Will I be able to maintain vehicle control What s the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders What s at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down and use a low gear This way engine drag can help your brakes and they won t have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping your vehicle under control at all times 4 22 yellow blue Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade This could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control Q Are there some things I should not do when driving down a hill A Yes These are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that s not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across You could roll over if you don t drive straight down Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL N This is called free wheeling Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade y
319. to these and take appropriate action 4 37 Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving Have your vehicle in good shape for winter You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle 4 38 yellow blue Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You ll have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful What s the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it s about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution yellow blue Accelerate gently Try not
320. tor air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger How does an air bag restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions 1 27 What will you see after an air bag inflates After an air bag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated Some components of the air bag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag or the instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag will be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags Air bag inflation doesn t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to ste
321. trays Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected please contact your dealer yellow blue Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored If ignored the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature If THEFTLOCK is activated your radio will not operate if stolen When THEFTLOCK is activated the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power has been interrupted If your battery loses power for any reason you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate Activating the Theft Deterrent Feature The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure NOTE If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4 3 19 Write down any three or four digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN Tum the radio off Press the 1 and 4 buttons together Hold them down until shows on t
322. tric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle yellow blue Fuel Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications which have been developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association AAMA and endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines For more information write to American Automobile Manufacturers Association 7430 Second Ave Suite 300 Detroit MI 48202 Be sure the posted octane is at least 87 If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If it s bad enough it can damage your engine If you re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service But don t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you re accelerating or driving up a hill That s normal and you don t have to buy a higher oc
323. trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over e Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression your vehicle can tilt even more 4 24 yellow blue For reasons like these you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn t mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over Driving across an incline that s too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline don t drive across it Find another route instead Q What if I m driving across an incline that s not too steep but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill What should I do A If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the surface is like before you drive it Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you re crossing an incline be sure you and your passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you ll be right in its path
324. ts in the center and on the sides of your instrument panel You can move the outlets from side to side or up and down to direct the flow of air or The use of hood air deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system close the outlets altogether When you close an outlet it will increase the flow of air coming out of any outlets that are open These outlets do not completely shut off airflow when in a closed vent position Defogging and Defrosting On cool humid days use DEFOG to keep the windshield and side windows clear Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the windshield in extremely humid or cold conditions Use DEFROST with the temperature knob toward the red area and the fan control toward HI Rear Window Defogger The lines you see running across the rear window are the rear window defogger The lines warm the glass To turn on the rear window defogger press this button next to the fan control knob The rear window defogger will only work if the ignition switch is turned to RUN For best results first clear the window of as much snow or ice as possible The defogger will shut itself off after several minutes If you need additional warming time press the button again You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing the button The rear window defogger button will activate the rear window defogger and the heated outside rearview mirrors Do not attach a t
325. tton The delay can be varied in five steps 0 15 30 60 and 90 seconds When the HEADLAMP DELAY button is held in the Light Emitting Diode LED on the mirror will show five step changes in brightness When the LED is at its brightest the headlamp delay will be 90 seconds and when it is most dim the delay will be Zero seconds Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Intensity Control The instrument panel intensity control is located next to the parking headlamp switch Turn the thumbwheel up to adjust the instrument panel lights Turn the thumbwheel up to the first notch to return the radio display and gear shift indicator LED display to full intensity when the headlamps or parking lamps are on To turn on the dome lamps with the vehicle doors closed turn the thumbwheel up to the second notch position yellow blue Exit Lighting and Delayed Illumination With this feature your interior lamps will come on and stay on for up to 25 seconds when entering the vehicle and up to 5 seconds when leaving your vehicle When the doors are opened the dome lamps will only come on if the dome lamp button is in the out position When all doors are closed or the dome lamp button is pressed in the lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will then fade out Dome Lamps The dome lamps will come on when you open the doors You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel located next to the parking headlamps switch kno
326. ty belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position a You ll be using the lap belt Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one 1 50 yellow blue Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt Putthe restraint on the seat Run the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how yellow blue 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 To tighten the belt pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger ANUSPSPRwNNNAHIAI P ePlel lBiielPuPlU clcUcChRLiLL AA yellow blue Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Althoug
327. ual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index 2 23 Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can 4 help You ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The engine coolant heater electrical cord is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment near the power steering reservoir 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet 2 24 yellow blue Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord won t reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you don t it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything h
328. ufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg loaded then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system only if The trailer parts can withstand 3 000 psi 20 650 kPa of pressure The trailer s brake system will use less than 0 02 cubic inch 0 3 cc of fluid from your vehicle s master cylinder Otherwise both braking systems won t work well You could even lose your brakes If everything checks out this far make the brake tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to the rear brakes But don t use copper tubing for this If you do it will bend and finally break off Use steel brake tubing yellow blue Driving with a Trailer If you have a rear most window open and you pull a trailer with your vehicle carbon monoxide CO could come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness or death See Engine Exhaust in the Index To maximize your safety when towing a trailer Have your exhaust system ins
329. uilt the vehicle Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you can t control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness don t drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it s one of those hills that s just too steep to climb descend or Cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill Isthere a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places Isthere good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping Isthere a straight path up or down the hill so you won t have to make turning maneuvers Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path boulders trees logs or ruts What s beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you don t know It s the smart way to find out Isthe hill simply too rough Steep hills often have rut
330. ull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the retractor to set the lock safety belt quickly if you ever had to 6 To tighten the belt feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger blue Larger Children Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle s safety belts If you have the choice a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide 1 54 Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat But they need to use the safety belts properly Children who aren t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash Children who aren t buckled up can strike other people who are yellow blue Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can t properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two ch
331. under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule Drive axle service see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for proper lubricant to use Locking Differential Drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change At subsequent oil changes check fluid level and add fluid as needed If driving in dusty areas or towing a trailer drain fluid and refill every 15 000 miles 25 000 km More frequent lubrication may be required for heavy duty or off road use 7 7 yellow blue Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Lo Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components or every 3 months whichever occurs first See footnote Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See foot
332. ur off road driving safer and more enjoyable Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields if so equipped are properly attached Be sure you read all the information about your four wheel drive vehicle in this manual Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you ll be driving If you don t know you should check with law enforcement people in the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle Put heavier items as far forward as you can Be sure the load is secured properly so driving on the off road terrain doesn t toss things around yellow blue Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the r
333. ure auto dimming and defrost modes To turn on the auto dimming feature press and hold the inside rearview mirror TEMP button for eight seconds See Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror with Compass Temperature Display and Headlamp Delay in the Index for further information To turn on the defrost feature press the rear window defrost button See Rear Window Defogger in the Index for further information Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger s side mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes yellow blue Storage Compartments Your vehicle has a variety of storage compartments designed to store small items Glove Box To open your glove box move the release button toward the passenger s side and pull the door open Center Overhead Console Your vehicle has an overhead console It has storage compartments inside it Your vehicle also has a Universal Transmitter See Universal Transmitter in the Index Sunglasses Compartment The center overhead compartment can be used to conveniently store your sunglasses To open the center compartment press the release button located at the rear of the compartm
334. ush on the air bag module in the center of the steering wheel to sound the horn Tilt Wheel A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the lever Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level then release the lever to lock the wheel in place 2 39 Multifunction Lever we SET CRUISE ON R A OFFONN A DELAY n The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your Tum Signal and Lane Change Indicator Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Windshield Wipers Windshield Washer e Cruise Control 2 40 yellow blue Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change To signal a lane change just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you complete your lane change The lever will return by itself when you release it If you move the lever all the way up or down and the arrow flashes at twice the norma
335. will mute while seeking REV 4 Press and hold this button to reverse quickly through a track selection Release it to resume playing 3 18 yellow blue FWD 6 Press and hold this button to advance quickly through a track selection Release it to resume playing SEEK Press the right arrow to seek to the next selection on the CD Press the left arrow to search for the previous selection on the CD The sound will mute while seeking P SCAN Press this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RANDOM will appear on the display Press PSCAN again to turn off random play TAPE AUX Press this button three times if you have a disc loaded in the changer and the radio is turned on to play a compact disc Press AM FM to return to the radio when a compact disc is playing Press TAPE AUX to switch between the tape remote CD if equipped and console mounted CD changer if all are loaded Compact Disc Changer Errors If ERR appears on the display it could be that You are driving on a very rough road The disc should play when the road gets smoother A disc is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet Itis very humid If so wait about an hour and try again The disc player is very hot The CD changer door is open Completely close the changer door to restore normal operation An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of the
336. with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only Tocheck the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release all brakes Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year for instance each spring and fall You should let your dealer s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Steering and Suspension Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc yellow blue Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust s
337. y can have the support they need in a frontal crash Some infant seats come in two parts the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable 1 42 yellow blue A forward facing child restraint C E positions a child upright to face forward in the vehicle These forward facing restraints are designed to help protect children who are from 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and about 26 to 40 inches 66 to 102 cm in height or up to around four years of age One type a convertible restraint is designed to be used either as a rear facing infant seat or a forward facing child seat 1 43 1 44 blue A booster seat F G is designed for children who are about 40 to 60 Ibs or even up to 80 lbs 18 to 27 kg or even up to 36 kg and about four to eight years of age A booster seat is designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Booster seats with shields use lap only belts however booster seats without shields use lap shoulder belts Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window When choosing a child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle but the child also has to
338. y interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment This system has a range of about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this Check to determine if battery replacement or transmitter resynchronization is necessary See the instructions that follow Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again yellow blue If you re still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Operation The driver s door will unlock automatically when UNLOCK is pressed If UNLOCK is pressed again within five seconds the passenger s doors wil
339. yellow blue The 1999 GMC Yukon Denali Owner s Manual 1 1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly It also explains the air bag system Features and Controls This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions Problems on the Road This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving such as a flat tire or overheated engine etc Service and Appearance Care Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good Maintenance Schedule This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact GMC for assistance and how to get service and owner publications It also gives you information on Reporting Safety Defects on page 8 10 Index Here s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual You can use it to quickly find something you want to read e GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem GMC the GMC Emblem and the name YUKON are registered trademarks and the name DENALI is a trademark of General Motors Corporati
340. your dealer will order you an extender It s free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you The extender will be just for you and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose Don t let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance yellow blue Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you ve had a crash do you need new belts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new belts If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and rep
341. ystem Inspect the body near the exhaust system Look for broken damaged missing or out of position parts as well as open seams holes loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust in the Index Engine Cooling System Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace as needed Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year Throttle System Inspection Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Replace parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables 7 39 Drive Axle Service Check rear front axle fluid level and add as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Inspection Every 12 months or at oil change intervals check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation More frequent lubrication may be required on off road use 7 40 yellow blue Brake System Inspection Inspect the complete system Ins

1999 GMC Yukon Owners Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents